2012 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M - General Motors · Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (3,1) Introduction iii The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-34

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-34Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-21Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-35Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-41Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-63

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42


2012 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-14Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names, andvehicle body designs appearing inthis manual including, but not limitedto, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,the CHEVROLET Emblem, andEQUINOX are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division wherever itappears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20845998 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through it is asafety symbol which means “DoNot,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not letthis happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

J : OnStar®

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

% : Steering Wheel Controls

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/Stabilitrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-15

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-20Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-20Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-24Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-25Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-25Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-26Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-26Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑5.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑3.

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑4(If Equipped).

C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑9.

D. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

E. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

F. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1 (If Equipped).

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Display (If Equipped). SeeForward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑41.

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)Indicator (If Equipped). SeeLane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑48.

G. Navigation Screen(If Equipped).

H. Safety Locks on page 2‑8.

I. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Navigation System(If Equipped). See NavigationSystem Manual.

J. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

K. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Outof View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑15.

L. Cruise Control on page 9‑38Cruise Control .

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑41(If Equipped).

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑48 (If Equipped).

M. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑4.

N. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

O. Horn on page 5‑3.

P. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

Q. Ignition Positions on page 9‑21.

R. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

S. Shift Lever. See Shifting IntoPark on page 9‑26.

T. Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9‑32 (If Equipped).

U. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37.

V. Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

W. CD Player on page 7‑24.

X. Driver Information CenterButtons (If Equipped). SeeDriver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24.

Y. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press this button to extend the key.The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V : For vehicles with the powerliftgate, press and hold until theliftgate begins to move to open theliftgate.

For vehicles without the powerliftgate, first press K, then press

and holdV to unlock the liftgate.

7 : Press and release to locate thevehicle. Press and hold for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. Press 7 again to cancel thepanic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q on theRemote Keyless Entrytransmitter.

2. Press and hold/ for abouttwo seconds. The turn signallamps will briefly flash to confirmthe vehicle has been started.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a time extensionis done or the key is inserted andturned to ON/RUN.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe outside, press Q or K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

Base Radio Shown, UplevelSimilar

There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.


1-6 In Brief

There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑7.

To manually unlock a door frominside the vehicle, pull once on thedoor handle to unlock it, and asecond time to open it.


{ : Press for Safety Locks. SeeSafety Locks on page 2‑8.

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

Unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.


In Brief 1-7

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use the power feature.The taillamps flash when the powerliftgate moves.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch toeither the 3/4 or MAX position.Press the button to open or closethe liftgate.

See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑9or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑10.

Windows

Press the front of the switch to lowerthe window. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Pushing or pulling the switch part ofthe way will open or close thewindow as long as the switch isoperated.

See Power Windows on page 2‑19.


1-8 In Brief

Seat Adjustment

Four‐Way Power Driver Seat

A. Seat Position Handle

B. Height Adjustment Control

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (A).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (B) upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Eight‐Way Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.


In Brief 1-9

Lumbar Adjustment

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

A. Lumbar Switch

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the switch (A) to increaseor decrease lumbar support.Release the switch when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5 for more information.

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.



1-10 In Brief

Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition is

turned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

To recall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions, press and hold“1” or “2.” The driver seat andoutside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.


In Brief 1-11

To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter and openthe driver door. If the driver door isalready open, pressing the RKEtransmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 formore information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, turn the ignition off andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, turning theignition off will activate the easy exitdriver seat.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

Heated Seats

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are near theclimate controls. To operate, theignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Indicator lights on the button showthe temperature setting.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and the headrestraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.


1-12 In Brief

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑12.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑13.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑15.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43.

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑28 for moreinformation.


In Brief 1-13

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑15.

Interior

Manual inside rearview mirrors canbe adjusted by holding in the centerto move the mirror for a clearer viewof behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑17.

Vehicles with an automatic dimminginside rearview mirror canautomatically reduce the glare fromthe headlamps of the vehicle behindyou. The dimming feature comes onand the indicator light comes oneach time the vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑18.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


1-14 In Brief

Interior LightingReading Lamps

These lamps are located on theoverhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Center Dome Lamps

There are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* : Turns the lamp off, even whena door is open.

1 : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ : Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

For more information on interiorlighting, See Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑4.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the turn signal/lane change lever.

O : Turn to operate the exteriorlamps.

O : Turns the exterior lamps off.

AUTO: Turns the exterior lamps onand off automatically depending onthe exterior light.

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.


In Brief 1-15

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL FRONT (WindshieldWasher): Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR : Push the windshieldwiper lever forward to spray washerfluid on the rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.


1-16 In Brief

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith these systems.

Climate Control System

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Controls

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Front Defrost

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

H. Air Conditioning


In Brief 1-17

Automatic Climate Control System

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Air Delivery Mode Controls

D. Front Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped) or AutomaticClimate Control System on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.See Parking Brake on page 9‑34.


1-18 In Brief

Transmission

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for theselection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving down hill or towing a trailerto limit the top gear and vehiclespeed.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑31 formore information.

Fuel Economy Mode

Vehicles with a 2.4L engine have aFuel Economy Mode. Whenengaged, fuel economy mode canimprove the vehicle's fuel economy.

Press the “eco” (economy) button bythe shift lever to turn this feature onor off. The “eco” light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged, and a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message“ECO MODE ON” displays. SeeFuel Economy Mode on page 9‑32.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

RADIO/BAND or SOURCE: Pressto choose between FM, AM, XM™,if equipped, CD, or AUX.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select radiostations.

Press to show available informationabout the current station or track.

D : Press to go to the main menu.

g SEEK: Press to seek theprevious station or track.

l SEEK: Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑10.


In Brief 1-19

For more information about the RearSeat Audio (RSA) System, see RearSeat Audio (RSA) System onpage 7‑34.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1-6 until the stationcan be heard again.

For more information, see “Storingand Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FMRadio (Radio with CD) on page 7‑14or AM-FM Radio (Radio withCD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑16.

Setting the Clock

The vehicle has a digital and ananalog clock.

For detailed instructions on settingeither clock, see Clock on page 5‑6.

Turning the Digital Clock On or Off

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Clock Displayed.

4. Press the MENU/SEL button toturn the clock on or off.

Setting the Time and Date



3. Select Set Time or Set Date.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob toadjust the highlighted value.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the next value.

6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press theEBACK button at any time orpress the MENU/SEL knob afteradjusting the minutes or year.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format



3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Month & Day Format



3. Highlight Month & Day Format.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

Setting the Auto Time Adjust



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn Auto Time Adjust on or off.


1-20 In Brief

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ satellite radiotuner and a valid XM satellite radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑19.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage devicesmay be connected, depending onthe audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑28.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audio systemand controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑36 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑38 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑42.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems.


In Brief 1-21

$ /c : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ x −: Press + to increase thevolume; press − to decrease thevolume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

ON/OFF5 CRUISE : Press to turnthe cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− : Move the thumbwheeldown toward SET/- to set a speedand activate cruise control, or tomake the vehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑38.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation system manualfor more information.


1-22 In Brief

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

The DIC buttons are located belowthe climate control system.

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR: Use this button to set orclear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemFor vehicles with FCA, this systemis intended to help avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingvisual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.


In Brief 1-23

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)For vehicles with LDW, it is intendedto help avoid unintentional lanedepartures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossing alane without using a turn signal.LDW uses a camera sensor todetect the lane markings. It onlyoperates at speeds of 56 km(35 mph) or greater.

The LDW indicator, @, appearsgreen if a lane marking is detected.It changes to amber, flashes, andsounds three chimes if the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal.

To turn LDW on and off, press theLANE DEPART button, located onthe steering wheel.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑48 for more information.

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the rear vision cameradisplays a view of the area behindthe vehicle when the vehicle isshifted into R (Reverse). Thedisplay will appear on the radioscreen.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑45.


1-24 In Brief

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system uses sensorson the rear bumper to assist withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43 for more information.

Roof Rack SystemThe roof rack cross rails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails. Lift the lever torelease and move the cross rail.Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes. Slidethe cross rails back and forth untilthe lock pins engage in the holesand a click is heard.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one cross rail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercross rail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise. SeeRoof Rack System on page 4‑2.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑7.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g located on the

console. i illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑27.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑35.


In Brief 1-25

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press and holdg until g and i illuminate andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑27.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑51.


1-26 In Brief

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button todisplay the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑53. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑51.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.. When road and weather

conditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.


In Brief 1-27

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6 for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.chevyownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.


1-28 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-13Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.



With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 60 m(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

RKE Without Remote Start Shown

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “RemoteLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34. If apassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. If the driverdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock except the driver door.These settings can be modified.



See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See“Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34. The turn signalindicators flash to indicate unlockinghas occurred. For more informationsee “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.Pressing K may also disarm thetheft-deterrent system. SeeAnti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑13.

V (Remote Liftgate Release):First press K, then press and holdV to unlock the liftgate. Forvehicles with the power liftgate,press and holdV until the liftgatebegins to move to open the liftgate.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and release onetime to locate the vehicle. Theexterior lamps flash and the hornchirps. Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and theturn signals flash until 7 is pressedagain or the key is placed in theignition and turned to ON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, first pressQ then press and hold/ to startthe engine from outside the vehicleusing the RKE transmitter. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑5for additional information.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key in theignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto this vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.When the replacement transmitter isprogrammed to this vehicle, allremaining transmitters must also bereprogrammed. Any lost or stolentransmitters will no longer workonce the new transmitter isprogrammed.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“Replace Battery in Remote Key”under Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑30.



The battery is not rechargeable. Toreplace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Thisbutton will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle has remotestart.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. Once the key is turnedto ON/RUN, the system will turn onat the setting the vehicle was lastset to. If the vehicle has heatedseats, they may come on during aremote start. See Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9 for moreinformation.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 foradditional information.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Press and hold / for abouttwo seconds. The turn signallamps will briefly flash to confirmthe vehicle has been started.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the key isinserted and turned to ON/RUN.



Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canbe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine has beenrunning for 5 minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition switch mustbe turned to ON/RUN and then backto LOCK/OFF using the key, beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To shut off the engine:. Press / until the parking lamps

turn off.. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Insert the key and turn it to ON/

RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood or doors are not

closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature. See yourdealer to add the manufacturer'sremote vehicle start feature to thevehicle.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door from theoutside of the vehicle, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Pull the handle oncefrom the inside to unlock the door,and a second time to open it.

Power Door Locks


There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.



There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

When locking the doors with apower door lock switch and a dooror the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. Three chimes sound tosignal the delayed locking feature isin use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or Q on the RKE transmittertwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediately lockall doors.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Safety Locks


The rear door safety locks switch ison the instrument panel.

Rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety locks.When activated, the LED light in theswitch changes to amber.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.



Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑28.


Unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.



Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.


(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use the power feature.The taillamps flash when the powerliftgate moves.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.


The power liftgate has three modesof operation. Mode selection iscontrolled by the interior modeswitch.



Choose the power liftgate mode byturning the dial on the switch untilthe indicator lines up with thedesired position. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The three modes are:

MAX: The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4: The liftgate power opens to areduced open height that can be setby the vehicle operator. Use thissetting to prevent the liftgate fromopening into overhead obstructionssuch as a garage door or roof

mounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still befully opened manually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than a standard manualliftgate.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. First pressing K and then

pressing and holdingV on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2‑3.

. Pressing the power liftgatebutton in the center of the modeswitch on the overhead console,with the driver door unlocked.

. Pressing the touchpad switch onthe liftgate outside handle, withall doors unlocked, to open theliftgate.

Press and release8 on theliftgate adjacent to the latch to closethe liftgate.



Pressing any button, or thetouchpad switch, while the liftgate ismoving stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE switch again reverses thedirection. The touchpad switch willstop the liftgate from moving. Thereis a minimum distance that thepower liftgate must already be openfor the system to hold it open.If movement is stopped below thatminimum, the liftgate closes.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled under extremetemperatures or low batteryconditions. If this occurs, the liftgatecan still be operated manually.

If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) while the power function isin progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the openposition. Cargo could fall out of the

vehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flash anda chime sounds. The liftgate staysopen temporarily, then slowlycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.

Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound and theliftgate will automatically reversedirection to the full closed or openposition. After removing theobstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again. If theliftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.The MANUALLY CLOSE POWERLIFTGATE warning message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) will

display. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate will resumenormal power operation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the body and presses againstthis sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Power Liftgate 3/4 Mode

To program the liftgate openingheight:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the 3/4 modeposition and power open theliftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate switch. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifrequired.



3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened with the3/4 mode selected, the liftgate stopsat the new set position.

If you do not hear the audible andvisual feedback when setting theintermediate stop position, you areattempting to set the height belowthe 3/4 open height minimum(approximately 1.5 m or 5 ft). Theliftgate cannot be set below thatminimum and the new setting willnot be recorded.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabled andall of the doors unlocked, the liftgatecan be manually opened andclosed. Manual operation of a

liftgate that also has poweroperation requires more effort thana standard manual liftgate.

To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate, usethe pull cup to lower the liftgate andclose. With the power liftgatedisabled, the liftgate electric latchwill still power latch once contact ismade with the striker. Always closethe liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, the turnsignals flash and the liftgate willnot move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected or haslow voltage, the liftgate will notopen. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

. Lock the vehicle using the key inthe driver door.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the liftgate without setting offthe alarm. The system rearms whenthe liftgate is closed.



Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

. Allow the alarm to time out afterabout 30 seconds and resetitself.

The alarm automatically disarms.

If the system is armed and any dooris unlocked without pressing K onthe RKE transmitter, the alarmsounds.

How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-in hasoccurred while the system wasarmed.

If the alarm has been activated, theTHEFT ATTEMPTED message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 5‑30 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.



If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or device thatdisarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choose thedriver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.



Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on and help to clear fogor frost from the surface of themirrors.

1 (Rear Window Defogger): Thisbutton is on the climate controlpanel.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑3 for more information.

Blind Spot MirrorsThe blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upperand outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.



Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, look atthe main driver/passenger sidemirror to observe traffic in theadjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double check beforemoving slowly into theadjacent lane.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle is equipped withmemory mirrors, there is an optionto have the mirrors tilt down, whenin R (Reverse), to more easily seethe ground near the vehicle.

When the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse), both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downward.They will return to their previousposition when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse), the ignition isturned to OFF, or the vehicle is leftin R (Reverse) for an extendedperiod of time.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center and move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjust themirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use and pullit for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons at the bottom of themirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight comes on each time the vehicleis started.

O : Press to turn automaticdimming on or off.

If the vehicle has a rear visioncamera (RVC) the O button forturning the automatic dimmingfeature on or off will not beavailable. See Rear Vision Camera(RVC) on page 9‑45 for moreinformation.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.



The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power windows work when theignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑25.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.



Express Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress‐down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and release it toactivate the express‐down feature.The express mode can be canceledat any time by briefly pressing,or pulling the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): This featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Presso to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LEDlight comes on when activated.

Presso again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it are onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror. The ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP) tooperate the sunroof. See IgnitionPositions on page 9‑21 andRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑25.

. Press and hold the front or rearof the driver side switch to openor close the sunroof. Thesunshade automatically openswith the sunroof, but must beclosed manually.

. Press and hold the rear of thepassenger side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold thefront of the switch to close.

Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front or rearof the driver side switch toexpress-open or express-close thesunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction. Thesunroof then returns to the full-openposition.



Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging thewater drainage system. Periodicallyopen the sunroof and remove anyobstacles or loose debris. Wipe thesunroof seal and roof sealing areausing a clean cloth, mild soap, andwater. Do not remove grease fromthe sunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-23When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-33

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-34Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-39Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-41Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-52


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of theseat cushion.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.



Power Seat AdjustmentFour‐Way Power Driver Seat

A. Seat Position Handle

B. Height Adjustment Control


rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (A).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the control (B) upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.

Eight‐Way Power Seats


rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear of thecontrol up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the entire control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.



Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

A. Lumbar Switch

If available, press and hold the frontor rear of the switch (A) to increaseor decrease lumbar support.Release the switch when theseatback reaches the desired levelof lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.




Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttons onthe outboard side of the driver seatare used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isturned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred to asRKE Memory positions. SeeRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3 formore information.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”



Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the manually saved ButtonMemory positions, press and hold“1” or “2.” The driver seat andoutside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby pressing the appropriate memorybutton. If the memory position is stillnot recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)

The Memory Remote Recall featurecan recall the driver seat andoutside mirrors to previously storedRKE Memory positions whenentering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is turned off,the positions of the driver seat andoutside mirrors are automaticallystored to the RKE transmitter thatwas used to start the vehicle. Thesepositions are called RKE Memorypositions and may be different thanthe previously mentioned ButtonMemory positions saved to the“1” or “2” buttons. To automaticallyrecall RKE Memory positions,unlock the driver door with the RKEtransmitter and open the driver door.If the driver door is already open,pressing the RKE transmitter Kbutton will also activate the RKEMemory recall. The driver seat andoutside mirrors will move to thepreviously saved RKE Memorypositions.

This feature is turned on or off usingthe vehicle personalization menu.See “Memory Remote Recall” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

To stop recall movement, press anyof the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling a memoryposition, the recall may stop.Remove the obstruction; then pressand hold the appropriate manualcontrol for the memory item that isnot recalling for two seconds. Tryrecalling the memory position againby opening the driver door andpressing the RKE K button. If thememory position is still not recalling,see your dealer for service.




This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, turn the ignition off andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, turning theignition off will activate the easy exitdriver seat.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

To stop recall movement, press oneof the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and hold thepower seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are near theclimate controls. To operate, theignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe button, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting, and onelight indicates the lowest.



The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be programmed to turn onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the heated seatbutton to use the heated seats afterthe vehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

To program the heated seat featureto enabled, see “Remote Start AutoHeat Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34 formore information.

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

With this feature, either side of therear seatback can be folded downfor more cargo space.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.



To fold the seatback down:

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand place the front seatbacks inthe upright position. SeeReclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5. 2. Lift the lever on the top of the

seatback.

3. Fold the seatback forward.

The filler panel behind the seatwill fold with the seatback tospan the gap between the rearof the seat and the cargo area,creating a flat load floor. Do notlift the filler panel.

Keep the seatback in the upright,locked position when not in use.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever on top ofthe seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward, thenrelease the lever when theseatback is in the desiredposition.

To slide the entire seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift and hold the release barunder the front of the seatcushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition.

3. Release the bar.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure the seat is lockedinto place.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle. Inaddition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑12 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!



When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑35 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑37.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.



There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.



Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑19.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.



To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑13.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.

After the height adjuster is set to thedesired position, try to move it downwithout pressing the releasebutton (A) to make sure it haslocked into position. Press therelease button to lower the heightadjuster.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.



Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners are activated in acrash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑20.

Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through your dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side of theseatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. The belt should not be twistedand it should lie flat. The elasticcord must be under the belt andthe guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

and across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release thesafety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety belt canbe removed from the guide. Slidethe guide back into its storagepocket located on the side of theseatback.

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.



A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑12 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑20.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑24.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑35 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑37.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13 formore information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near-frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designed toinflate if the impact exceeds apredetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on howfast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds. Forexample:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an object thatdeforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags. SeeAirbag System on page 3‑21.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is above

the system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or because ofwhat the repair costs were. Forfrontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down. Forseat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment is



determined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑23.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. In

moderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Frontalairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body, stopping theoccupant more gradually. Seat‐mounted side impact and roof-railairbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over theoccupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion is

not toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑24 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑23.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does not



prevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnthe interior lamps on, turn the

hazard warning flashers on, andshut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate. You can lock thedoors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls forthose features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.

In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑15 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑15.



. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If you areusing remote start, if equipped, tostart the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the system check.When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑13.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags are notaffected by the passenger sensingsystem.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe right front passenger seat. Thesensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including: aninfant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing childrestraints in a rear seat, even ifthe airbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑13.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate) theright front passenger frontal airbaganytime the system senses that aperson of adult size is sittingproperly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.



For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the right front passenger frontalairbag, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and bodybuild. Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat ) on page 3‑50 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑52.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If thishappens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.



If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sitting inthe right front passenger seat, butthe off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat. If this happens,

use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the right front passengerfrontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑33 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.



A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable (turnon) the passenger airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag is turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑13 forimportant safety information.

The on indicator may be lit if anobject, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put on anunoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. To

purchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑13.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, front endor side sheet metal, they maykeep the airbag system fromworking properly. Changing ormoving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system forthe right front passengerposition, which includes sensors

that are part of the passengerseat. The passenger sensingsystem may not operate properlyif the original seat trim isreplaced with non-GM covers,upholstery or trim, or with GMcovers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as anaftermarket seat heater or acomfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning off thepassenger airbag(s). SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑28.

If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer

Satisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑60 for additionalimportant information.

Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addressesfor Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in thismanual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure onpage 13‑1.



In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenance orreplacement. Make sure the airbagreadiness light is working. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly. Donot open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑23. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death. Tohelp make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

If an airbag inflates, you will need toreplace airbag system parts. Seeyour dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away. SeeAirbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑13 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑15 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑15.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a child



restraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The child

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

might also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would then beapplied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, besure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 formore information. Children can be



endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints. Inthe U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.



A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑28 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint, you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.



If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat,review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place thechild restraint or the size of the childrestraint, you may not be able toaccess certain safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints.

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

C. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.



Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inyour vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There are twolower anchors for each LATCHseating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving or ina crash.



Your child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

The rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.

Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are located on theback of the rear seatback. The rearcompartment storage panel/covermight need to be adjusted to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.



Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑41 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way outof the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.



2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether according toyour child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestor head restraint and asingle tether is being used,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestor head restraint and a dualtether is being used, routethe tether over theseatback.

. If the position being usedhas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and a dualtether is being used, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



. If the position being usedhas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and a singletether is being used, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side andback‐and‐forth. There should beno more than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.



Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑41.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.



4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.



Armrest Retaining Strap

{ WARNING

A rear center armrest that is notproperly stowed and securedcould fall forward during a suddenstop or collision. The armrestcould contact an infant secured ina rear‐facing child restraint in thecenter seat position. Fasten theretaining strap onto the stowedarmrest before installing arear‐facing child restraint in therear center seat position.

When new, the vehicle's glove boxmaterials included an armrestretaining strap. Use it to secure the

center armrest before installing arear‐facing child restraint in thesecond row center seat position.

Stow the rear seat center armrest.Attach the retaining strap to thearmrest loop (A) and to the centertop tether anchor on theseatback (B). Make sure theretaining strap's clips are firmlyattached.

Install the rear-facing childrestraint using the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and theinstructions described previously.

Remove the armrest retaining strapbefore installing a forward facingchild restraint in the center seatposition, as it may interfere with theattachment of the top tether to thetop tether anchor on the seatback.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑41.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑28 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑13 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will not

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑28 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑43 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑43 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator on thepassenger airbag statusindicator should light and stay litwhen you start the vehicle. SeePassenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑13.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the use ofthe top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑43 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑28 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

There may be a storagecompartment on the instrumentpanel. Pull the handle to open.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersTwo cupholders are in the centerconsole. Cupholders may be locatedin the second row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.

Center Console Storage

For vehicles with a center consolestorage, use the lever (A) on thefront to open.


4-2 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover from thevehicle, pull both ends toward eachother. To reinstall, place each end ofthe cover in the holes behind therear seat.

Cargo Tie-Downs

The vehicle may be equipped withfour cargo tie downs (A) located inthe rear compartment.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie‐downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

This vehicle may be equipped with aroof rack. For roof racks that do nothave cross rails included, GMcertified cross rails can bepurchased as an accessory. Seeyour dealer for additionalinformation.


Storage 4-3

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecross rails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle's centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16.

The roof rack cross rails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails. These are theonly positions that the cross railswill lock.

Lift the lever to release and movethe cross rail.

Position the cross rail on both sidesof the vehicle at the same time.


4-4 Storage

Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes. If thelever is not tight, then the cross railis not engaged in a side rail hole.

Slide the cross rails back and forthuntil the lock pins engage in theholes and a click is heard as thepins align and the cross rail locks.

Try sliding the cross rails forwardand backward to ensure that theyare correctly secured and that thelevers stay tight to the cross rails.

Do not stand on the plastic lowerbody panels when loading cargo onthe roof rack.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one cross rail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercross rail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-12Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-13

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-14MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-20

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-21Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-22Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-23Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-23Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-28Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-28Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-29Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-30Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-30Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-30Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-32Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-32Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-33


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-33Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-34

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth® or OnStar®, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑36or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑38 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑42 orOnStar Overview on page 14‑1 formore information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press again toturn the sound on.

_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press toselect an audio source.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheelpad to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignition inACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe, brieflymove the wiper lever down. Forseveral wipes, hold the wiperlever down.



nL FRONT (WindshieldWasher): Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached. When thewindshield wiper lever is released,additional wipes may occurdepending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosen orthaw them. Damaged blades shouldbe replaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑29.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on LO, HI,or INT, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are performingwipes due to windshield washing,the wipers continue to run until theyreach the base of the windshield.



Rear Window Wiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR (Rear Washer): Pushthe windshield wiper lever forwardto spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift lever isin R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other information

from the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna forlong periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.See Multi-Band Antenna onpage 7‑23 for the location of thevehicle's antenna. The compasssystem is designed to operate for acertain number of miles or degreesof turn before needing a signal fromthe GPS satellites. When thecompass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5‑28 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.



ClockThe infotainment system controls,located on the instrument panel, areused to access the time and datesettings through the menu system.See Operation on page 7‑10 forinformation about how to use themenu system.

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate navigationmanual to set the clock.

Setting the Clock with DateDisplay

To set the Time and Date:

1. Turn the infotainment system on.

2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time and Date Settings.

3. Select Set Time or Set Date.



6. To save the time or date andreturn to the Time and DateSettings menu, press theE BACK button at any time orpress the MENU/SEL knob afteradjusting the minutes or year.

To set the 12/24 hour format:




4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

To set the month and day format:



3. Highlight Month and DayFormat.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect MM/DD (month/day) orDD/MM (day/month).

To set the auto time adjust:



3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.

4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn Auto Time Adjust on or off.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect Time Zone, and thenselect the time zone.

6. Press the MENU/SEL knob toturn Daylight Savings on or off.

Setting the Clock Without DateDisplay

To set the Time and Date:


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.



3. Select Set Time.



6. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, presstheE BACK button at anytime or press the MENU/SELknob after adjusting the minutes.

To set the 12/24 hour format:


2. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings, or pressthe H button.


4. Press the MENU/SEL knob toselect the 12 hour or 24 hourdisplay format.

Setting the Clock (Radio withCD and Touchscreen)

To set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG button toenter the menu options. Turn theTUNE/MENU knob to scrollthrough the available setupfeatures. Press the TUNE/MENUknob or press the Time screenbutton to display other optionswithin that feature.

2. Press + or − to decrease orincrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen button formilitary time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phone orMP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.



Certain accessory plugs may not becompatible with the accessorypower outlets and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑63.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe vehicle's speed can be selectedto display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and the speedometerin either kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Telltales onthe speedometer indicate whetherkilometers or miles were chosen.The DIC will show the vehicle'sspeed after the limit on thespeedometer has been reached.

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric



English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel andthe low fuel light comes on, but thevehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.

Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric



English

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward thecolored line, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continueseveral times if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.



The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑21.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑28 forimportant safety information. Theoverhead console has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds



as a system check. If you are usingremote start to start the vehicle froma distance, if equipped, you may notsee the system check. Then, afterseveral more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF,or either the on or off symbol to letyou know the status of the right frontpassenger frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑13 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.

The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

When this light comes on, the DriverInformation Center (DIC) alsodisplays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑27.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.



MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑21 for more information.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause this lightto come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered by the

vehicle warranty. This could alsoresult in a failure to pass arequired Emission Inspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.



If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑54. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn thelight off.

. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑51.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.



The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits needto be working

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set. Thelight stays on if the parking brakedoes not fully release. If it stays onafter the parking brake is fully

released, there is a brake problem.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑77.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑28 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light

For vehicles with the lane departurewarning system, this light is locatedon the center of the instrumentpanel. This light briefly comes ongreen while starting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then turns off.



This light also comes on greenwhen the system is switched on andready to operate.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑48 for more information.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning LightThese lights are located on thecenter of the instrument panel.

The vehicle ahead light comes onwhen a vehicle is ahead and apossible collision can occur.

The forward collision alert comes onand warns when following a vehicleclosely. The light then flashes whena vehicle is being rapidlyapproached.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.



See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited. If theStabiliTrak system is off, the systemdoes not assist in controlling thevehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak system and the warninglight turns off.

Check the DIC for applicablemessages. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑31 formore information.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑35 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑37 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑35 formore information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑33 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires to thepressure value shown on the Tireand Loading Information label. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑50 formore information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

This indicates that there may be aproblem with the TPMS. The lightflashes for about a minute and stayson steady for the remainder of theignition cycle. This sequencerepeats with every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑53 for moreinformation.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.



Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) switch, located onthe center console near the shifter,is pressed. For vehicles with aDriver Information Center (DIC) anECO MODE ON message displays.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑30 for more information.Press the switch again to turn offthe light and exit the fuelsaver mode.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for afew seconds when the ignition isturned on as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light is a circlelocated on the fuel gauge. This lightcomes on and a chime soundsperiodically when the vehicle is lowon fuel. The light goes off when fuelis added to the fuel tank.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 5‑30 formore information.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑14 for more information.



High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on when thelights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑38 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). It displaysinformation about the vehicle andwarning messages if there is asystem problem detected. DICmessages display in the center ofthe instrument panel cluster. SeeVehicle Messages on page 5‑27 formore information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34 formore information.

DIC Operation and Displays

Use the DIC buttons located in thecenter of the instrument panel toaccess different displays. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages.

It also shows the shift lever position,the odometer, and the direction thevehicle is driving.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use thisbutton to set or clear the menu itemwhen it is displayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button until Trip/Fuel Information Menu is displayed.Then press R to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Instantaneous Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Digital Speedometer. Turn-by-Turn. Blank Display



Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an average ofthe vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows the approximateaverage liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.The fuel economy can be reset by

pressing SET/CLR while theAverage Fuel Economy display isshowing. The display may not resetto zero.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

This display shows the current fueleconomy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economy thatthe vehicle has right now andchanges frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averageeconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset of this value. The averagespeed can be reset by pressingSET/CLR while the Average VehicleSpeed display is showing.

Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.



Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 or the Navigation manual,if the vehicle has navigation, formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed. Thenpress R to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Blank Display

Unit

Press SET/CLR to enter the unitmenu. Then press Q or R to switchbetween METRIC or US when theUnit display is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm the setting. This willchange the displays on the clusterand DIC to either metric or English(US) measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehicle withthe approximate pressures of allfour tires. Tire pressure is displayedin either kilopascal (kPa) or inpounds per square inch (psi).

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑51 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑53 formore information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑29. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑10. Inaddition to the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.



It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system, press SET/CLR while the Oil Life display isactive. The display will ask forconfirmation of a reset. Press Q orR to select Yes or No. Then pressSET/CLR to confirm the selection.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Compass on page 5‑5.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed by thedriver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appear oneafter another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressSET/CLR to acknowledge that youreceived the messages and to clearthem from the display. Somemessages cannot be cleared fromthe DIC display because they aremore urgent. These messagesrequire action before they can becleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and remember thatclearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. You will find thepossible messages that can bedisplayed and some informationabout them grouped by subject inthe following information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑26 for more information.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicle toyour dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low; see BrakeFluid on page 10‑24.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attempt todrive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑5.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑38 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showing whichdoor is open. If the vehicle has beenshifted out of P (Park), a DOOROPEN message will also bedisplayed. Close the doorcompletely.

MANUALLY CLOSE THEPOWER LIFTGATE

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑17.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — STOPENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.



ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Check theoil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination. Theperformance may be reduced the

next time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reducedspeed while this message is on, butmaximum acceleration and speedmay be reduced. Anytime thismessage stays on, the vehicleshould be taken to your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Fuel System Messages

ECO MODE ON

On some models, this messagedisplays when the fuel economymode has been turned on bypressing the eco button near theshift lever. See Fuel Economy Modeon page 9‑32 for more information.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If your vehicle has the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9‑41.



FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray. To clean the system,clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system,this message may display if theLDW system cannot activate due toa temporary condition. See LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) onpage 9‑48 for more information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑43.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW) andForward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled and needservice. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑43 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when the rear drive systemis overheating. This message turnsoff when the rear drive system coolsdown. If the warning message stayson for a while, you need to reset thewarning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again. If themessage stays on, see your dealerright away. See All-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑33 for more information.



SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if a problem occurs withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the AWDsystem needs service. See yourdealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑35.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off. SeeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑37for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isturned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isfirst turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑35 formore information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Safety Belt Messages

BUCKLE SEATBELT

This message displays as areminder when the safety belt is notbuckled.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.



Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑53 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑53 for more information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displays LEFTFRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFTREAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatethe location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑21.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑42, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. TheDIC also shows the tire pressurevalues. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission. Seeyour dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shifted toP (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.



Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control. SeeWindshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

E BACK: Press to exit or movebackwards in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Turn the infotainment system onand press the CONFIG button toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of the MENU/SELECT knob to select theVehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.All of the menus may not beavailable. Only those tied to thefeatures on your vehicle will beshown.



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

Auto Fan Speed

This selection is available onvehicles with the Automatic ClimateControl System. Choose from thefollowing blower speed settings:

High: Increased speed.

Low: Reduced speed.

Normal: Moderate speed.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Auto Fan Speed ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight “High,” “Normal,” or “Low.”Press the knob to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.

Air Conditioning Mode

This will allow you to select whetheror not the air conditioning comes onautomatically the next time thevehicle is started. “On” means thatthe air conditioning will be on atstart up, regardless of whether itwas on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. “Off” meansthe air conditioning will be off at thenext start up, regardless of whetherit was on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. “LastSetting” means that when thevehicle is started, the airconditioning will resume whicheversetting it was at the last time thevehicle was turned off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen Air Conditioning Mode ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight “On,” “Off,” or “LastSetting.” Press the knob to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Start Auto HeatSeats” is highlighted to togglebetween “On” or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirm the selectionand go back to the last menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror




When on, this feature will move thedriver seat rearward upon turningthe ignition off and the driver dooropening. This may be performed tomake it easier to exit the vehicle.See the “Easy Exit Driver Seat”information under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

This allows you to turn the easy exitseat feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Easy Exit Driver Seat” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Chime Volume” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select

“Normal” or “High.” Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in reverse. See ParkTilt Mirrors on page 2‑17 for moreinformation.

This allows you to turn the park tiltmirrors feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Reverse Tilt Mirror” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the following willbe displayed:. Park Assist

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Park Assist” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “On,” “Off,”or “Tow Bar.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43 for more information

Languages

Select the Languages menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish



Turn the MENU/SELECT knob toselect the language. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Vehicle Locator Lights” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”

or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Exit Lighting” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “Off,”“30 Seconds,” “1 Minute,” or“2 Minutes.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Unlocked Door Anti LockOut” is highlighted to togglebetween “On” or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirm the selectionand go back to the last menu.

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Auto Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors,” “Driver Door,” or “Off.”Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. If you want tooverride the delay you can press thepower door lock on the instrumentpanel.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Delayed Door Lock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.



Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Memory Remote Recall

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” is highlighted. Turn theknob to select “Flash Lights” or“Off.” Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Lock Feedback” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select

“Lights and Horn,” “Lights Only,”“Horn Only,” or “Off.” Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors” or “Driver Door.” Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat, outsidemirrors upon unlocking the driverdoor with the RKE, and opening thatdoor. The current driver is identifiedwhen the RKE transmitter is used tounlock the driver door. See “Memory

Remote Recall” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

Memory Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will be recalledas you unlock the vehicle.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Memory Remote Recall” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”

or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select “Return to Factory Settings”to return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select“Yes” or “No.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Load Management . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal/lane change lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control):Operates the exterior lamps. Turn toone of the following positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):Turns the exterior lamps on and offautomatically depending on theexterior light. The vehicle will defaultto the AUTO setting when it is firststarted.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns on theparking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.


6-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash‐to‐pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you, then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)system makes the low-beamheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness in daylight when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp band is in the

automatic position.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.. The parking brake is released.

Fully functional Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lightsand other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel cluster will be lit.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position, thelow-beam headlamps come on. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

To idle your vehicle with the DRLoff, move the shift lever to P (Park).The DRL will stay off until the shiftlever is moved out of the P (Park)position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.


Lighting 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

Do not cover the light sensor on topof the instrument panel or theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button, on the center ofthe instrument panel, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.


6-4 Lighting

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse;see Fuses on page 10‑36 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamps

For vehicles with fog lamps, thecontrol is located on the turn signal/lane change lever.

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

# FOG (Fog Lamps): Turn the foglamp band on the lever to # andrelease it, to turn the fog lamps onor off. The band will return to itsoriginal position.

The parking lamps or low‐beamheadlamps must be on to use thefog lamps.

The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps areturned on. When the high‐beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis control is located on theinstrument panel, to the left of thesteering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten or dimthe lights.

Dome LampsThere are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamps off, even when a dooris open.

1 (Door): The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.


Lighting 6-5

+ (On): Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe dome lamp, cargo lamp, andfoot lamp inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened, if thedome lamp is in the door position. Inaddition, these lamps come onwhen the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) unlock button is pressed.They stay on for 20 seconds or untila door is opened. After the door isopened and then closed, the lightremains on for 20 seconds, or untilthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


6-6 Lighting

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinning fastenough at idle to produce all of thepower needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on, suchas: headlamps, high beams, foglamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.It can increase engine idle speed togenerate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occur insteps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays, itis recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-3Overview (Radio with CD andTouchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

RadioAM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14

AM-FM Radio (Radio withCDand Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-36Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

This vehicle's infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakers aremodified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine, radio,or other systems, and coulddamage them. Follow federalrules covering mobile radio andtelephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑25 for moreinformation.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved to adifferent vehicle.



Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. g SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the previousstation.

. CD: Selects the previoustrack or rewinds within atrack.

C. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

D. RADIO/BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.



E. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

F. AUX. Selects a connected

external audio source.

G. E BACK

. Menu: Moves onelevel back.

. Character Input: Deletesthe last character.

H. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

I. MENU/SEL. Press: Opens the menus

and selects menu items.. Turn: Highlights menu

items or sets values whilein a menu. Manuallyselects radio stations whilelistening to the radio.

J. k. CD: Plays or pauses

the CD.

K. CD. Selects the CD player

when listening to adifferent audio source.

L. 5 / ?

. Opens the phonemain menu.

. Mutes the audio system.

M. l SEEK

. Radio: Seeks the nextstation.

. CD: Selects the next trackor fast forwards within atrack.

N. H. Opens the clock menu.

O. CONFIG. Opens the settings menu.

P. X (CD Eject)

. Removes a disc from theCD slot.

Q. TONE. Opens the tone menu.



Overview (Radio with CDand Touchscreen)Keeping your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive is importantfor safe driving. The infotainmentsystem has built-in featuresintended to help with this bydisabling some features whendriving. A grayed-out function is notavailable when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Do the followingbefore driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operation,buttons on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, setting thetone, and adjusting thespeakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can be calledeasily by pressing a singlebutton or a single voicecommand for vehicles equippedwith phone capability.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often while using thenavigation system could cause acrash and you or others could beinjured or killed. Focus yourattention on driving and limitglances at the moving map on thenavigation screen. Use voiceguidance whenever possible.

Infotainment System Overview

The infotainment system iscontrolled by using the buttons onthe faceplate and the touch screen.

See “Infotainment Control Buttons”in this section for more information.



A. VOL/ O

B. g (Seek Down)

C. FAV (Favorite Pages 1-6)

D. SOURCE

E. Buttons 1 to 6

F. F HOME (Home Page)

G. E BACK

H. INFO (Information)

I. MENU/SEL (Menu/Select)

J. k (Play/Pause)

K. ? (Mute)

L. 5 (Phone Menu)

M. l (Seek Up)

N. H (Clock Menu)

O. CONFIG (Configuration Menu)

P. X (Eject)

Q. TONE



Infotainment Control Buttons

The buttons on the faceplate areused to start primary functions whileusing the infotainment system.

VOL/ O (Volume/Power):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn to adjust the volume.

k (Play/Pause): Pressk to start,pause, and resume playback. SeeCD Player on page 7‑24, and MP3on page 7‑27 for more information.

SOURCE: Press to change theaudio sources such as AM-FMRadio, XM™ (if equipped), CD,and AUX.

TONE: Press to access the soundmenu screen to adjust bass,midrange, and treble. See AM-FMRadio (Radio with CD) on page 7‑14or AM-FM Radio (Radio withCD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑16 formore information.

INFO (Information): Press totoggle through an audio informationscreen.

CONFIG (Configure): Press toadjust features for radio, display,phone, vehicle, and time.

HOME: See “Home Page” followingin this section.

MENU/SEL: Turn to highlight afeature. Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

5 (Phone): See Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑36 orBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑38 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑42 for moreinformation.

E BACK: Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

If on a page accessed directly by afaceplate button or Home Pagescreen button, pressingE BACKwill go to the previous menu.

FAV (Favorite Pages 1-6): Pressto display the current page numberabove the preset buttons. Thestored stations for each list displayon the touch-sensitive presetbuttons at the bottom of the screen.The number of preset FAV lists canbe changed in theConfiguration Menu.

l (Seek Up):

1. Press to seek the next track.

2. Press and hold to fast forwardthrough a track.

3. Release the button to return toplaying speed. See CD Playeron page 7‑24 and MP3 onpage 7‑27 for more information.

4. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped),press to seek to the next strongstation.



g (Seek Down):

1. Press to seek to the beginning ofthe current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longer thanfive seconds, the current trackstarts from the beginning.

2. Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track. Releasethe button to return to playingspeed. See CD Player onpage 7‑24 and MP3 onpage 7‑27 for more information.

3. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped),press to seek to the previousstrong station.

Preset Buttons (1-6): The presetbuttons numbered one through sixcan be used to select stored AM,FM, and XM (if equipped) stations.

H : Press to set the time.

X (Eject): Press to eject a discfrom the CD player. See CD Playeron page 7‑24.

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some togglescreen buttons highlight when activeand gray out when inactive.

Home Page

The infotainment system displays ahome page that makes accessingmany of the features an easyprocess.

Back: If on page two of the HomePage, press Back to return to pageone of the Home Page. If on pageone, Back serves no function.

Home: While navigating throughother menus, press to go back tothe Home Page to start a differentfeature.

FAV: Press to display a page ofstored (favorite) AM, FM, or XM (ifequipped) stations. Keep pressingFAV to scroll through the favoritepages.

Info: Press to toggle through anaudio information screen.

The Home Page Menu lists theoptions Customize Home Page andRestore Home Page Defaults.

Out of all available Home Pageicons, up to eight icons can beselected and sorted for the firstHome Page screen.

Home Page Features

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,USB/iPod, and AUX.

See AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD)on page 7‑14 or AM-FM Radio(Radio withCD and Touchscreen) onpage 7‑16, Satellite Radio onpage 7‑19, CD Player on page 7‑24,and Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑28.



Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑36or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑38 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑42.

Press the Config screen button todisplay the Config main page. Fromthis display, you can adjust featuressuch as time and date, radio,phone, vehicle, and display.

Press the Tone screen button todisplay the Tone main page. Adjustthe tone and speakers by pressingthe screen buttons to change thelevels of sound for treble, midrange,bass, fade, and balance. SeeAM-FM Radio (Radio with CD) on

page 7‑14 or AM-FM Radio (RadiowithCD and Touchscreen) onpage 7‑16.

Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD)on page 7‑14 or AM-FM Radio(Radio withCD and Touchscreen) onpage 7‑16.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio (Radio with CD)on page 7‑14 or AM-FM Radio(Radio withCD and Touchscreen) onpage 7‑16.

Press the XM screen button (ifequipped) to display the XM mainpage and play the current or lasttuned XM channel. See AM-FMRadio (Radio with CD) on page 7‑14or AM-FM Radio (Radio withCD andTouchscreen) on page 7‑16 andSatellite Radio on page 7‑19.

Press the CD screen button todisplay the CD main page and playthe current or last CD trackselected. See CD Player onpage 7‑24.

Press the USB screen button todisplay the USB main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑28.

Press the AUX screen button toaccess any connected auxiliarydevice. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑28.

Languages

The vehicle supports English,French (Canadian), and Spanish.The default language is English.

To change the display language,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.



English and Metric UnitConversion

To change the display units betweenEnglish and metric units, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑24 for more information.

Cleaning the Display

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfacescould scratch the glass. Use onlya soft cloth and do not spraycleaner directly on the system asit could affect the mechanicalparts.

Do not wipe the panel with a hardcloth or use a volatile liquid such aspaint thinner; it could scratch thesurface or erase the characters onthe buttons.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system is operatedby using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, display menus,and steering wheel controls,if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Press toturn the system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

VOL/O (Volume/Power): Turn toadjust the volume.

5 / ? (Mute): For vehicles withOnStar, press and hold 5 / ? tomute the infotainment system. Pressand hold 5 / ? again, or turn the

VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

For vehicles without OnStar, press5 / ? to mute the infotainmentsystem. Press 5 / ? again, or turn

the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.

Menu System

Controls

The MENU/SEL knob and theE BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.



Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

E BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

F : Press to go to main menu.

SOURCE: Press to:. Displays menu of AM, FM, XM,

CD, or AUX.. Press to toggle through menu.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tomove the highlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the highlighted option.

Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toactivate the setting.

Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tochange the current value of thesetting.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toconfirm the setting.



Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the function.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toturn the function on or off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the character.

2. Press the MENU/SEL button toselect the character.

Press theE BACK button todelete the last character in thesequence or press and hold todelete the entire charactersequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the MENU/SELbutton until the value changesto 0.

Press theE BACK button to goback to the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.




Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:


2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press theE BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.



Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe Radio with CD is first turned oncan be set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.



Radio

AM-FM Radio (Radiowith CD)

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

RADIO/BAND or SOURCE: Pressto turn the radio on and choosebetween AM, FM, XM™,if equipped, CD, or AUX.

MENU/SEL: Turn to manuallysearch for stations.

D HOME: Press to go to themain menu.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

l SEEK org SEEK: Press tosearch for stations. Press and holdto scan for stations.

k : Press to pause the CD.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.



RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Press the MENU/SEL knob to openthe main radio menu for that band.

Selecting a Band

Press the RADIO/BAND orSOURCE button to choose AM, FM,or XM™, if equipped. The laststation that was playing startsplaying again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg SEEK orl SEEK,to automatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK until the station on thedisplay is reached, then release thebutton.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to selectthe frequency on the display.

Favorites List

1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.




Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores the RDSstations sorted by program type inthe FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updatedwhen the station lists areupdated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU/SEL knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.

AM-FM Radio (RadiowithCD and Touchscreen)

Playing the Radio

Audio Source

VOL/ O (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the radio on or off.

2. Turn to increase or decrease thevolume of the active source (i.e.,current audio source, activenavigation voice guidance,or traffic prompts).

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See "Steering Wheel Controls" onpage 5‑2 for more information.



To access the radio main page,press the SOURCE button on thefaceplate, the Now Playing screenbutton, or one of the audio screenbuttons on the Home Page.

While on the audio main page,press the Source button repeatedlyto display and cycle through theavailable sources (AM, FM, and XM(if equipped), CD, USB/iPod,and AUX).

Infotainment System Menus

Tone Settings

To access the tone settings, pressthe Home Page Tone button or theTONE button on the faceplate.

Use the tone settings to adjust thefollowing features:. Setting the tone. Adjusting the speakers

Setting the Tone

To adjust the tone:. Treble: Press + or − to change

the level.. Middle (Midrange): Press +

or − to change the level.. Bass: Press + or − to change

the level.

Adjusting the Speakers

To adjust the speaker balance:. Press the left arrow on the

bottom for more sound from theleft speakers or the right arrowon the bottom for more soundfrom the right speakers. Themiddle position balances thesound between the left and rightspeakers.

To adjust the speaker fade:. Press the upper arrow for more

sound from the front speakersand the lower arrow for moresound from the rear speakers.The middle position balancesthe sound between the front andrear speakers.

EQ Settings

The EQ settings are selectedthrough the tone menu. Press theleft or right arrows to cycle throughthe EQ options. The availablechoices are Pop, Rock, Jazz,Classical, and Talk.

Finding a Station

To select the band, see “AudioSource” earlier in this section.

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to find aradio station. To select a presetstation, touch the FAV button andchoose a preset station.



Seeking a Station

Pressg orl to search for astation.

AM

1. Press the AM screen button onthe Home Page or select AMfrom the source pop-up todisplay the AM main page.

2. From the AM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe AM stations.

3. Press to select the desiredoption. To update the station list,touch Refresh.

FM

1. Press the FM screen button onthe Home Page or select FMfrom the source pop-up todisplay the FM main page.

2. From the FM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe FM stations.

3. Press to select the desiredoption. To update the station list,touch Refresh.

XM (If Equipped)

1. Press the XM screen button onthe Home Page or select XMfrom the source pop-up todisplay the XM main page.

2. From the XM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe XM categories.

3. Touch a desired category andthen turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll the station list.

Changing the Sources

To change audio sources from anyof the audio main pages (AM, FM,XM, CD, USB/iPod, or AUX), pressthe SOURCE button on thefaceplate or the Source screenbutton to display a pop-up ofavailable audio sources. Touch-tapor press the SOURCE button on thefaceplate repeatedly to change thedesired source.

Storing Radio Station Presets

There are a few ways to storepresets.

Up to 36 preset stations can bestored. AM, FM, and XM,if equipped, can be mixed.

1. From the AM, FM, or XM mainpage, press and hold one of thepreset screen buttons located atthe bottom of the screen. After afew seconds, a beep will beheard and the new presetinformation will display on thatscreen button.

2. Touch and hold a preset buttonto store the currently activestation. After a few seconds, abeep will be heard and the newpreset information will display ona small pop-up display at thebottom of the screen.

3. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.

To change the number of presetpages, see “Mixed-Band Presets”following for more information.



Recalling a Preset Station

To recall a preset station from a FAVpage, do the following:. Press the FAV button on the

faceplate to display the FAVpop-up. Select the desiredpreset from the pop-up.

. Press the FAV screen button atthe top bar to display the presetpop-up that appears at thebottom of the page. Press one ofthe preset screen buttons to goto the selected preset station.

. In the AM, FM, or XM(if equipped) main page, pressone of the preset screen buttonsto go to the selected presetstation.

Mixed-Band Presets

Each page can store six presetstations. The presets within a pagecan be from different radio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV button located on thefaceplate or the FAV screen buttonon the top bar. The current pagenumber displays above the presetbuttons. The stored stations foreach FAV page display on thepreset buttons at the bottom of thescreen. The number of FAV pagesdisplayed can be changed in theRadio Settings in theConfiguration Menu.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. If XM serviceneeds to be reactivated, the radiowill display “No Subscription PleaseRenew on channel XM1.” A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com orcall 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. andwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the XMradio are:

SOURCE: Press to turn the radioon and choose between AM, FM,and XM™, if equipped.

g SEEK orl SEEK: Press to goto the previous or next station.



FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations.Press to open the XM SatelliteRadio menu.

Selecting the XM Band

Press the SOURCE button tochoose between the AM, FM, andXM bands. The last channel playedin that band begins to play whenthat band is selected.

Removing or AddingCategories (Radio with CD)

XM channels are organized incategories.

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby using theg SEEK orl SEEKbuttons, or the MENU/SEL knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight the category.

5. Press the MENU/SEL knob toremove or add the category.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusingg SEEK,l SEEK, theMENU/SEL knob, or the menusystem.

Selecting a Channel Using

g SEEK orl SEEK

. Press and releaseg SEEK orl SEEK to go to the previousor next channel.

. Press and holdg SEEK orl SEEK to scroll through theprevious or next channel untilthe channel is reached.

Selecting a Channel Using theMENU/SEL Knob

To select an XM channel using theMENU/SEL knob:

Turn the MENU/SEL knob tohighlight an XM channel. Thechannel is selected after a shortdelay.

To select a channel using the menu:

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob andselect Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System

1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.



Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button until thechannel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

Removing or AddingCategories (Radio with CD andTouchscreen)

Removing or Adding Categories

1. From the Home Page press theConfig screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select Add/Remove XMCategories.

4. From the Add/Remove XMCategories screen, select ordeselect any category to beused in XM mode. A checkmarkwill indicate that the category isselected.

Turning XM Album Art On or Off

1. From the Home Page press theConfig screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select XM Album Art to turn onor off.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S. and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated, noaction is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.



Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data; no action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:The XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with the XMRadio eight‐digit radio ID label. Thislabel is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar,the XM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.



Audio Players

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CD andMP3 audio.

With the vehicle on, insert a discinto the slot, label side up. Theplayer pulls it in and begins playing.While playing, the navigationsystem is available.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to disc quality,the method of recording, the qualityof the music that has beenrecorded, or the way the disc hasbeen handled.

There can be increased skipping,difficulty in recording tracks,difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting.If these problems occur, check thedisc for damage or try a knowngood disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs. The

labels could get caught in theplayer.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the vehicle on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, labelside up. The player pulls it in therest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressX to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control the CDplayer are:

CD: Press to choose between theCD and AUX player.

l SEEK org SEEK: Press toselect tracks or to fast forward orrewind within a track.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the CD that maybe available.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks.

X (Eject): Press to removethe CD.

k : Press to pause a CD or MP3track; press again to resumeplayback.

Playing an Audio CD (Radiowith CD)

Press the CD button. If there is adisc in the player it begins playing.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on the datastored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Press the MENU/SEL knob andthen set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl SEEK org SEEK to fast forward or rewindwithin the current track.

Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg SEEK orl SEEK toselect the previous or next track.

. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.



Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Playing an Audio CD (Radiowith CD and Touchscreen)

1. Press the CD screen button onthe Home Page or select CDfrom the source pop-up todisplay the CD main page.

2. From the CD screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe menu options.

3. Press to select the desiredoption.

On the CD main page a tracknumber displays at the beginning ofeach track. Song, Artist, and Albuminformation displays when available.

Use the following controls to playthe disc:

k (Play/Pause): Use to start,pause, or resume play.

g SEEK (Seek Down):. Press to seek to the beginning of

the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

l SEEK (Seek Up):. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

MENU/SEL: Turn to the right or leftto select the next or previous track.Press this knob to select the menu.If a track is selected from the list,the system plays the track andreturns to the CD screen.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.



. The disc is dirty, scratched, wet,or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.

If the CD is not playing correctly, forany other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow the sameinstructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires a CDto be fully scanned before themusic navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Press to play thetracks randomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.



There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

Root Directory

The root directory is treated as afolder. All files contained directlyunder the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directoryfolders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder is emptyor contains only folders, the playeradvances to the next folder in thefile structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files without anyfolders or playlists, all files areunder the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability. Theseplaylists are treated as specialfolders containing compressedaudio song files.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack in the center console. Possibleauxiliary audio sources include:. Laptop computer. MP3 player. Tape player

The auxiliary input allows portabledevices to be connected using the3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or theoptional USB port.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑10.



The auxiliary input is located in thecenter console.

This jack is not an audio output. Donot plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers areencouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When adevice is connected, the systemautomatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, press theNow Playing screen button on theHome Page, then press Sourcerepeatedly to cycle through all of theavailable audio source screens, untilthe AUX source screen is selected.

Playback of an audio deviceconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Playing from a USB Port(Radio with CD)

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods®

. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)

. USB Drives

. Zunes™

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod®

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audiobooks. Composers





2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audiobooks, or Composers.


Shuffle

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to On orOff, then press theE BACKbutton to return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off, then press theE BACK button to return to themain screen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Playback starts from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune™

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setShuffle Songs (Random) to Onor Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Press the MENU/SEL knob and setRepeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Playback starts fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.



Playing from a USB (Radiowith CD and Touchscreen)

A USB mass storage device orMicrosoft Transfer Protocal (MTP)device can be connected to theUSB port.

The USB port is in the centerconsole.

The USB icon displays when theUSB device is connected.

USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB

drives connected must complywith the USB Mass StorageClass specification (USB MSC).

. Only USB MP3 players and USBdrives with a sector size or512 bytes and a cluster sizesmaller or equal to 32 kbytes inthe FAT32 file system aresupported.

. Hard disk drives are notsupported.

. The following restrictions applyfor the data stored on a USBMP3 player or USB device:

‐ Maximum folder structuredepth: 11 levels.

‐ Maximum number of MP3/WMA files that can bedisplayed: 1,000

. WMA with Digital RightsManagement (DRM) from onlinemusic shops cannot be played.WMA files can only be playedback safely if they were createdwith Windows Media Playerversion 8 or later.

‐ Applicable playlist extensionsare: .m3u, .pls.

‐ Playlist entries must be in theform of relative paths.

‐ The system attribute forfolders/files that contain audiodata must not be set.

To play a USB device, do one of thefollowing:. Connect the USB and it begins

to play.. Press the Now Playing screen

button on the Home Page, thenpress the SOURCE button onthe faceplate repeatedly to cyclethrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the USBsource screen is selected.

While the USB source is active, usethe following to operate USBfunction:

k (Play/Pause): Press to start,pause, or resume play of the currentmedia source.

g SEEK (Seek Down):

1. Press to seek to the beginning ofthe current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, theprevious track plays. If playinglonger than five seconds, thecurrent track restarts.



2. Press and hold to reversequickly through playback.

3. Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

l SEEK (Seek Up):

1. Press to seek to the next track.

2. Press and hold to advancequickly through playback.Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

USB Menu

Press any of the following buttonson the USB Menu:


Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the USB. Selecta playlist to view the list of all songsin that playlist. There might be adelay before the list displays. Selecta song from the list to beginplayback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the USB. Select anartist name to view a list of allalbums by the artist. There might bea delay before the list displays. Toselect a song, touch All Songs thenselect a song or touch an albumthen select a song from the list tobegin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the USB. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the USB. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genreson the USB. Select a genre to viewa list of all songs of that genre.Select a song from the list to beginplayback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th

generation). iPod with video (5.0 and 5.5

generation). Video is not shown;only audio is supported.

. iPod classic (6th generation)

. iPod touch (1st and 2ndgeneration)



There may be problems withoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect and control an iPod,connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod's dockconnector. Connect the other end tothe USB port in the center console.

iPod music information displays onthe radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.

The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.When the vehicle is off while aniPod is connected using the iPod

USB cable, the iPod battery stopscharging and the iPod automaticallyturns off.

If the iPod is an unsupported model,it can still be listened to in thevehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.


Press any of the following buttonson the iPod Menu:

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists storedon the iPod.

2. Select a playlist name to view alist of all songs in the playlist.

3. Select the desired song from thelist to begin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the artists storedon the iPod.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all songs by the artist.


Albums:

1. Press to view the albums storedon the iPod.

2. Select an album name to view alist of all songs on the album orselect All Songs to view allsongsby the artist.


Song Titles:

1. Press to view a list of all songsstored on the iPod.




Genres:

1. Press to view the genres storedon the iPod.

2. Select a genre name to view alist of artists of that genre.

3. Select an artist to view albumsor All Songs to view all songs ofthat genre.

4. Select album to view songs.


Podcasts:

1. Press to view the podcastsstored on the iPod.

2. Select a podcast name to playthe desired podcast.

Composers:

1. Press to view the composersstored on the iPod.

2. Select a composer name to viewa list of all songs by thatcomposer.


Audio Books:

1. Press to view the audio booksstored on the iPod.

2. Select an audio book name toview a list of all audio books.

3. Select the desired audio bookfrom the list to begin playback.

Playing from an iPhone®

This feature supports the followingiPhone model:. iPhone (3G – 3GS)

To use the iPhone, follow the sameinstructions as stated earlier forusing an iPod.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allow therear seat passengers to listen toand control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or otherauxiliary sources. RSA can onlycontrol music sources that the frontseat passengers are not listening to,except on radios where dual controlis allowed.

RSA can function when the frontradio is off.X displays on theinfotainment system when RSAis on.



Audio can be heard throughwired headphones (not included)plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment system with wirelessheadphones, audio can also beheard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.

To listen to a portable audio devicethrough the RSA, attach theportable audio device to either thefront or rear auxiliary input,if available. Turn the device on, thenchoose the front auxiliary input withthe RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase ordecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right. Use thevolume control on the headphonesfor wireless headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio, CD, and if thesefeatures are available: DVD, front orrear auxiliary, HDD, USB. The frontradio may override the rearselection as required.

© ¨ (Seek): While listening to theradio, press to go to the previous orto the next station and stay there.If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

Press and hold © or ¨ until “Tune”

displays. Continue to press © or ¨ totune to an individual station. Tunestays active until © or ¨ has notbeen pressed for several seconds.If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter ifmore than 10 seconds have played.If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios. Pressand hold © or ¨ to fast reverse orfast forward.



When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to cursor up

or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ tocursor left or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to go tothe next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio, this function may beinactive on some radios.

When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the disc or display discinfo. If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios.

When a disc is playing in the CD orDVD changer, press and holdPROG to select the next disc,if multiple discs are loaded. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto a disc, this function may beinactive on some radios.

The PROG button may be used toaccess the menu of an MP3. Oncein the menu, use © or ¨ to makeselections.

When a DVD video menu isdisplayed, press PROG, or pressand hold PROG to perform themenu function, then press ENTER.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.



. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of the

Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m(30 ft). Not all phones support allfunctions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.



Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑10.

5 or 5 \ ? (PHONE/MUTE): Pressto enter the Phone main menu.Press 5 \ ? to mute the audiosystem.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑10.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available.See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.



Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display. The PINis used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 4. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to link toand follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone's owner's guideor contact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.



To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 or 5 \ ? once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/SEL buttonto scroll through the entire list ofnames/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑10 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls (CallWaiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.



Conference Calling

Conference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑10 for moreinformation.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELknob and select Enter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑10 for more information.

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, press theb / g button located on the steeringwheel. Use the commands below forthe various voice features. Foradditional information, say “Help”while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.



Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.



Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to 30phone numbers as name tags in theHands‐Free Directory that is sharedbetween the Bluetooth and OnStarsystems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.



Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”



Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear the lastnumber.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” Thesystem dials the last numbercalled from the connected cellphone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g, andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on the cellphone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “Storing andDeleting Name Tags.”



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS, Inc. Productincludes software. All RightsReserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

"Made for iPod and iPhone" meanthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod or iPhone,respectively, and has been certifiedby the developer to meet Appleperformance standards. Apple is notresponsible for the operation of thisdevice or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please

note that the use of this accessorywith iPod or iPhone may affectwireless preformance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPodnano, and iPod touch aretrademarks of Apple Inc., registeredin the U.S. and other countries.



2 NOTES


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control SystemsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Controls

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Front Defrost

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

H. Air Conditioning


8-2 Climate Controls

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Turn theknob completely to T to turn thefan off.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control: Tochange the current mode, selectone of the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost): Clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering. The air conditioning maycome on under certain conditions.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. To overridethis feature, select outside air.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon the outside air. An indicator lightcomes on. Outside air is circulatedthroughout the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.



Automatic Climate Control SystemThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Air Delivery Mode Controls

D. Front Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation toheat or cool the vehicle to theselected temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster,recirculation may beautomatically selected in warmweather. The recirculation lightwill not come on. Press thehto select recirculation; press itagain to select outside air.



Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed.Adjusting the fan speed while inautomatic mode places the fanunder manual control. The AUTOindicator light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains in automaticcontrol.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press mode up or modedown to cycle through the differentair delivery modes. The currentmode is shown on the display.

Select from the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost): Clearsthe windshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.Selecting defrost disables theautomatic mode.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.


Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing, theair conditioning will not work. Whenin AUTO, the air conditioning willcome on automatically as needed.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. Press toalternate between recirculation andoutside air, if the vehicle does nothave a separate outside air button.

The indicator light turns on whenrecirculation is selected. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle or prevent outside airand odors from entering.

% (Outside Air, If Equipped):Press to turn on the outside air. Anindicator light comes on. Outside airis circulated throughout the vehicle.



Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF. If turned on again, itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

L / M (Driver and PassengerHeated Seats): For vehicles withheated seats, see Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.The system uses the driver'sprevious settings to heat or cool theinside of the vehicle. The frontheated seats will turn on if it is coldoutside. The heated seat indicatorlights do not come on during aremote start. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑5.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses theinformation to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery mode.

Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

Air VentsUse the air outlets, located in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel, to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheelslocated near the center air outlets,to open or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑14.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Open the glove box completelyand locate the stop tab on top ofthe glove box door.

2. Push the stop tab upwards untilthe stop tab is under theinstrument panel assembly andthe glove box is released.

3. Unsnap the tabs beneath theglove box that connects it to thebottom of the instrument panelassembly.

4. Remove the glove box.

5. Locate the service door for thepassenger compartment air filter.

6. Push the two tabs upwards andrelease the latches holding theservice door. Lift theservice door.

7. Remove the old air filter.

8. Install the new air filter.

9. Close the service door andlatches.

10. Re‐install the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . 9-11Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-15Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-16

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-21Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-25

Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-35

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-37

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Object Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-43Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-51Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-51

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-52Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-53Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attention awayfrom the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment section formore information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑12.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second. Inthat time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering(2.4L L4 Engine)

If the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist system willcontinue to operate until you areable to stop the vehicle.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times until itstops, or it is held until it is stoppedfor an extended time, powersteering assist may be reduced. Thenormal power steering assist shouldreturn shortly after a few normalsteering movements.

The electric power steering systemdoes not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, such asabnormally high steering effort for aprolonged period of time, contactyour dealer for service repairs.

Hydraulic Power Steering(3.0L V6 Engine)

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.



Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.. Maintain a reasonable steady

speed through the curve. Wait until the vehicle is out of

the curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suited toexisting conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions. Butskids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Off-Road DrivingAll-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive and vehiclesnot equipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must notbe driven off-road except on a level,solid surface. To contact the tiremanufacturer for more informationabout the original equipment tires,see the Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Informationmanual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ WARNING

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutall-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.



. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Notice: Operating the vehicle forextended periods without thefront fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Re‐attach thefront fascia air dam after off-roaddriving.

Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Unsecured cargo on the loadfloor can be tossed aboutwhen driving over roughterrain. You or yourpassengers can be struck byflying objects. Secure thecargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as low aspossible. The heaviest thingsshould be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, not onthe roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that have beenset aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9‑28.



Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assessthe steepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.

When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.

. When possible, drive straight upor down the hill.

. Slow down when approachingthe top of the hill.

. Use headlamps even during theday to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You could beseriously injured or killed. As younear the top of a hill, slow downand stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with the transmissionin N (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.



. If driving uphill when thevehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it up thehill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.

. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly and youcould lose control.

. If driving downhill when thevehicle stalls, shift to alower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park), andturn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut,etc. – and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle can tilteven more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ WARNING

Getting out of the vehicle on thedownhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear of therollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud – the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when driving onsand. On loose sand, such as onbeaches or sand dunes, the tirestend to sink into the sand. Thisaffects steering, accelerating, andbraking. Drive at a reduced speedand avoid sharp turns or abruptmaneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy to losecontrol. Reduce vehicle speed whendriving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous. Iceconditions vary greatly and thevehicle could fall through the ice;you and your passengers coulddrown. Drive your vehicle on safesurfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Notice: Do not drive throughstanding water if it is deepenough to cover the wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe. Deep watercan damage the axle and othervehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the exhaust pipe under water.While the exhaust pipe is underwater, you will not be able to startthe engine. When going throughwater, the brakes get wet, and itmight take longer to stop. SeeDriving on Wet Roads on page 9‑11.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbody orchassis, or under the hood. Theseaccumulations can be a fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenanceservice is required. Refer to theMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If this

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.



Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑42.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills,something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑33 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.


. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. SeeClimate Control System in theIndex.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blocking theexhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑35.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑63.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedal whileshifting, and press lightly on theaccelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑77.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle's centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driver'sdoor open, you will find the labelattached near the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating



positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also shows thetire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑42 andTire Pressure on page 10‑50.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement “Thecombined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑60for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips.



Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).



Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowercenter pillar on the driver side ofthe vehicle or on the rear edge

of the driver door. The labelshows the size of the vehicle'soriginal tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of thevehicle. This is called GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR). To find out the actualloads on the front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weighstation and weigh the vehicle.Your dealer can help you withthis. Be sure to spread out theload equally on both sides of thecenter line.

Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying a heavyload, it should be spread out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.



The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your vehicle cancarry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehicle theright way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases, tools,packages, or anythingelse – they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued). Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first 1 000 km(600mi) and 5 000 km(3,000 mi), heavyacceleration in lower gearscan be used. Vehicle speeds

above 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑57 for thetrailer towing capabilities ofyour vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.



To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑25.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑34.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.



B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to some ofthe electrical accessories. It unlocksthe steering wheel and ignition.To move the key from ACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, pushin the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12‐volt poweroutlets, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission is alsounlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).



The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10‑74.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently to allow theoil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue cranking fora few seconds or until the

vehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.



2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the way tothe floor and hold it there as youhold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driver door isopened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any door isopened.

All these features will work when thekey is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).



To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, in front of the aircleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑34for more information.



2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too much forceon the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).

Shifting out of ParkTo shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealerfor service.



Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑28.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll. Donot leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps to be surethe vehicle will not move. SeeShifting Into Park on page 9‑26.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission shiftlever is located on the consolebetween the seats.



P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. Use P (Park) whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑26. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑57.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply theregular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑27.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑15.

N (Neutral): In this position theengine and transmission do notconnect. Use N (Neutral) to restart avehicle that is already moving.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.



Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

M (Manual Mode): Allows thedriver to select the range of gearpositions. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑31.

Manual Mode

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows for theselection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving downhill or towing a trailer tolimit the top gear and vehicle speed.The shift position indicator within theDriver Information Center (DIC) willdisplay a number next to the Mindicating the highest available gearunder manual mode and the drivingconditions when manual mode wasselected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus button onthe shift lever, to increase ordecrease the gear rangeavailable.

When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to a presetlower gear range. For this presetrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑24 for more information.All gears below that number areavailable to use. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areshifted automatically. To shift to5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)button or shift into D (Drive).



M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the − (Minus)button to the desired lower gearrange.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Fuel Economy ModeVehicles with a 2.4L engine have aFuel Economy Mode. Whenengaged, fuel economy mode canimprove the vehicle's fuel economy.

Press the “eco” (economy) button bythe shift lever to turn this feature onor off. The “eco” light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged. See Fuel EconomyLight on page 5‑22. A DriverInformation Center (DIC) message“ECO MODE ON” is also displayed.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑30 for more information.

When Fuel Economy Mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner and downshift later.. The torque converter clutch will

apply sooner and stay on longer.. The gas pedal will be less

sensitive.. The vehicle's computer will more

aggressively shut off fuel to theengine under deceleration.

. The engine idle speed will belower.

. Driving performance is moreconservative.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic, andadjusts itself as needed for roadconditions.

When using a compact spare tire onan AWD vehicle, the systemautomatically detects the compactspare and disables AWD. To restoreAWD operation and preventexcessive wear on the system,replace the compact spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible.See Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑18.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.



Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑17.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer and areparking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑57.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist the driverin stopping or decreasing vehiclespeed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle. Thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this time isnormal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedal asthe driving situation dictates. Thebrake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill on agrade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressure toensure that there is no rolling. Thebrakes will automatically releasewhen the accelerator pedal isapplied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.



TCS is on whenever the vehicleis started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS can beturned off if needed.

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL and SERVICESTABILITRAK may be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC)and d will be on. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑31.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

The g is located on the console.

The TCS off light comes on andTRACTION CONTROL OFF isdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) to indicate that thetraction control system has beenturned off. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑31.

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing g. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and release gagain to turn the system back on.

When TCS is turned off on AWDvehicles, the system may still makenoise. This is normal and necessarywith AWD hardware.



It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud, or snow androcking the vehicle is required. SeeIf the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑15for more information. See alsoWinter Driving on page 9‑13 forinformation on using TCS whendriving in snowy or icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press thecruise control button to re‐engagewhen road conditions allow. SeeCruise Control on page 9‑38.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure to thevehicle's brakes to help steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on. Trailer Sway Control(TSC) is also on automatically whenthe vehicle is started. See TrailerSway Control (TSC) on page 9‑63for more information.

When the stability control systemactivates, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak light willflash on the instrument panel. Thisalso occurs when traction control orTSC is activated. A noise may beheard or vibration may be felt in the

brake pedal. This is normal.Continue to steer the vehicle in theintended direction.

If there is a problem detectedwith StabiliTrak, SERVICESTABILITRAK is displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC) andd will stay on. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑27. When thismessage is displayed and/or dcomes on and stays on, the vehicleis safe to drive but the system is notoperational. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. See RideControl System Messages onpage 5‑31.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.



g is located on the console.

Both StabiliTrak and TractionControl can be turned off if neededby pressing and holding g until gand i come on the instrumentpanel. This will also disable the TSCfeature. When StabiliTrak is turnedoff, the system will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicle orlimit wheel spin. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. Press andrelease g again to turn the systemback on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.Press the cruise control button to re‐engage when road conditions allow.See Cruise Control on page 9‑38 formore information.

Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control, thecruise control automaticallydisengages. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑37 or TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑35. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads.



ON/OFF5 CRUISE: Press to turnthe cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+ tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down toward SET/- toset a speed and activate cruisecontrol, or to make the vehicledecelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise button turned off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

1. Press ON/OFF 5 CRUISE.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel andrelease it. The desired set speedbriefly appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thevehicle accelerates to thedesired speed, and thenrelease it.



. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle will slow down to theprevious set cruise speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. When the brakesare applied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch, the indicator light willgo off.

. Press* CANCEL.

. To turn off the cruise control,press ON/OFF 5 CRUISE. Thecruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if ON/OFF 5CRUISE is pressed or if the vehicleis turned off.



Object DetectionSystems

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) SystemFor vehicles with this feature, readthe following section before using it.

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA)system may help to avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingvisual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The FCA symbol is on top of theinstrument panel to the right of thesteering wheel.

The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ WARNING

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provideenough time to avoid a crash.FCA does not warn of any objectsthat do not look like a vehicle tothe FCA camera sensor, such aspedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information, seeDefensive Driving on page 9‑3.

{ WARNING

There are conditions where FCAmay not detect a vehicle ahead.These include winding roads or

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

weather conditions such as fog,rain, or snow that can limitvisibility. You could crash into avehicle ahead. Do not rely onFCA on winding roads or in poorvisibility conditions.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the redFCA display will flash and soundseveral beeps. When this occurs,the brake system prepares for driverbraking to occur more rapidly.Continue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.



Tailgating Alert

The red FCA display will staycontinuously illuminated if thevehicle ahead remains much tooclose.

Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press COLLISIONALERT to set the alert timing to far,medium, near or off. The first buttonpress shows the current controlsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting. Thechosen setting will remain until it is

changed and will affect both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehiclespeed. The faster the vehicle speed,the further away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

The green vehicle ahead indicatorwill appear when a vehicle isdetected ahead. Whenever thisindicator does not appear, FCA willnot respond. The indicator maydisappear on curves, highway exitramps, or hills, or due to poor

visibility. The FCA system will notdetect another vehicle ahead until itis completely in the driving lane.

{ WARNING

If the FCA camera sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged, it maynot detect a vehicle ahead. FCAmay not help avoid a collisionunder these conditions. Do notrely on FCA when the camera isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.Keep the windshield clean.

{ WARNING

If the headlamps are not cleanedor properly aimed, the FCAsystem may not detect a vehicleahead. FCA may not help avoid acollision under these conditions.Keep the headlamps clean andproperly aimed.



Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may sometimes setunnecessary alerts to turningvehicles, vehicles in other lanes,objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts arenormal operation and the vehicledoes not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑30.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parking andavoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withURPA, always check behind thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically whenthe shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow liftgate level. Objects mustalso be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from therear bumper. The distance objectscan be detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.



Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned onand off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34 formore information.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑81.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached to thevehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC) system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaypedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or any other object locatedoutside the camera's field of view,below the bumper, or under thevehicle.

Do not back the vehicle usingonly the RVC screen or by usingthe screen during longer, higherspeed backing maneuvers,or where there could be

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

cross-traffic. Perceived distancesmay be different from actualdistances.

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck before backing by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

An image appears on the radioscreen with the message CheckSurroundings for Safety when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The radio screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).

Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.



4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Camera. When a checkmark appears next to theCamera option, then the RVCsystem is on.

Symbols

The RVC system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the radio screen whileusing the RVC. The Ultrasonic RearPark Assist (URPA) system mustnot be disabled to use the cautionsymbols. The error message RearParking Assist Symbols Unavailablemay display if URPA has been

disabled and the symbols havebeen turned on. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑43.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing the radioscreen when an object is detectedby the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Symbols. When a checkmark appears next to theSymbols option, symbols willappear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Guidelines. When acheck mark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.

Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay on the radio screen whenthe system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.



Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary depending onvehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screen isdifferent from the actual distance.

The following illustration shows thefield of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off. See

“Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off” earlier in thissection.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directly intothe camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is in anaccident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to have thecamera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)For vehicles with this feature, readthe entire section before using it.

{ WARNING

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle and is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida lane change collision.

. Be loud enough to hear thewarning beeps.

. Work properly under badweather conditions or if thewindshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

LDW will operate even if it onlydetects lane markings on oneside of the road. It will not warn ifthe vehicle departs the lane fromthe side where it has not detecteda lane marker. The vehicleposition must be maintainedwithin the lane or, vehicledamage, injury, or death couldoccur. Even with LDW, alwayskeep your attention on the roadand maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane. Alwayskeep the windshield clean and donot use LDW in bad weatherconditions.



When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and three beepswill sound. LDW will not warn if theturn signal is on or if a sharpmaneuver is made.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, press theLANE DEPART control on thesteering wheel. The control indicatorwill light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on briefly.

LDW operates at speeds of 56 km(35 mph) or greater. If LDW is on,the LDW indicator will appear greenif the system detects a left or rightlane marking. This indicator willchange to amber, flash, and threebeeps will sound if the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal.

To change the volume of thewarning chime, see “Chime Volume”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34 for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appear:. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.. The weather may be limiting

visibility.



This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.

{ WARNING

If the LDW camera sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged, it maynot detect a vehicle ahead. LDWmay not help avoid a collisionunder these conditions. Do notrely on LDW when the camera isblocked by snow, ice, or dirt.Keep the windshield clean.

{ WARNING

If the headlamps are not cleanedor properly aimed, the LDWsystem may not detect lanesahead. LDW may not help avoid acollision under these conditions.Keep the headlamps clean andproperly aimed.

LDW warnings may occasionallyoccur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation, the vehicle does not needservice.

LDW Messages

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD: Thismessage may appear because thefront camera is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or due toroad spray.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE: This messagemay appear if LDW does notactivate due to a temporarycondition.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA: Thismessage may appear to indicatethat LDW is not working properly.If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.



FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑53. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑51.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,

commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specification D 4814in the United States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada.Some gasolines contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑52 for additionalinformation.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.



Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether the

fuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑51.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Department ofEnergy has an alternative fuels

website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations that dohave E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol content isgreater than 85%.

At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures that donot meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics of E85fuel make it unsuitable for use whentemperatures fall below −18°C(0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), it may take more time tostart the engine.



It is best not to alternate repeatedlybetween gasoline and E85. If youdo switch fuels, it is recommendedthat you add as much fuel aspossible — do not add less than11 L (3 gal) when refueling. Youshould drive the vehicle immediatelyafter refueling for at least 11 km(7 mi) to allow the vehicle to adaptto the change in ethanolconcentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑54.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle. Donot use cellular phones. Keepsparks, flames, and smokingmaterials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattendedwhen refueling the vehicle. This isagainst the law in some places.Do not re-enter the vehicle whilepumping fuel. Keep children awayfrom the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.



The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand the door will open. Turn the fuelcap counterclockwise to remove. Donot release the cap too soon or itwill spring back. Reinstall the cap byturning it clockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑15 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑81.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑15.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury to youand others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”



For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑77. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑78.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly. Forexample, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a traileronly if all the steps in this section

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

have been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see “Trailer Towing”following in this section. Traileringchanges handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fueleconomy. With the added weight,the engine, transmission, wheelassemblies and tires are forced towork harder and under greaterloads. The trailer also adds windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements. For safe trailering,correctly use the proper traileringequipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven. Theengine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often.



. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions. Donot drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

. For vehicles with the Ultra RearParking Assist (URPA) system,turn the system off when towinga trailer. If the tow bar isinstalled while not towing atrailer, change the URPA systemto the “Tow Bar” setting. SeeUltrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑43 for more information.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that hand tothe left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer are

burned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting down along or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may show signssimilar to engine overheating. Toavoid this, let the engine run whileparked, preferably on level ground,with the transmission in P (Park) fora few minutes before turning the

engine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet. Turnthe wheels into the curb if facingdownhill or into traffic if facinguphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.



3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Things

that are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑20.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weight ofthe Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment. Theweight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.



Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model and options.

Vehicle

Maximum TrailerWeight with Trailer

Brakes†

GCWR*

2.4 L L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)

2.4 L L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)

3.0 L V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)

3.0 L V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)

† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg(1,000 lbs). See Towing Equipment on page 9‑62 for more information.

*The Gross Combination WeightRating (GCWR) is the totalallowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer includingany passengers, cargo, equipmentand conversions. The GCWR for thevehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑3 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongue

weight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑16.

If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).



After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) orthe RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires to theupper limit for cold tires. Thesenumbers can be found on theCertification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealer forassistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑28.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.



Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If TSC detectsthat the trailer is swaying, thevehicle's brakes are automaticallyapplied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑37 for more information.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑32 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑33.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Steering Fluid (2.4LL4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Power Steering Fluid (3.0LV6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-27Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-34

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-35Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Electrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-43Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58


10-2 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-62Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-73

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-77Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.


10-4 Vehicle Care

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑33.

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts,and tools before attemptingany vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, parts canlater break or fall off. Youcould be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑13.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑32.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑15.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. Move the secondary hoodrelease lever to the right torelease the striker. The lever isnear the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Cover on page 10‑10.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10‑23.

F. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑37.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

I. Battery on page 10‑26 (Outof View).

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑17.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir(Under Engine Cover). SeePower Steering Fluid (2.4L L4Engine) on page 10‑22 orPower Steering Fluid (3.0LV6 Engine) on page 10‑22.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

D. Engine Cover on page 10‑10.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. SeeBrakes on page 10‑23.

G. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑37.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74.

J. Battery on page 10‑26 (Outof View).

K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑17.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Engine Cover

Engine Cover 3.0L V6

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover Bolt

C. Engine Cover

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (B).

3. Raise the engine cover (C) torelease from the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.


Vehicle Care 10-11

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping the tipdown, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation of

what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscosity

grade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or rags

containing used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably. Forthe oil life system to work properly,the system must be reset every timethe oil is changed.


Vehicle Care 10-13

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished, itindicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑29.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENU button todisplay the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check thetransmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired as soonas possible.


10-14 Vehicle Care

There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this should bedone at your dealer. Contact yourdealer for additional information orthe procedure can be found in theservice manual. To purchase aservice manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑13.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and be sureto use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

3. Remove the four air cleanerhousing cover screws.


Vehicle Care 10-15

4. Pull straight up on the cover, andwhile holding the cover, removethe air cleaner filter.

5. Inspect or replace the air cleanerfilter.

How to Reinstall Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Install the air cleaner filter intothe air cleaner housing. Theouter air cleaner filter seal mustbe fitted properly in the aircleaner housing.

2. Align the air cleaner housingcover tabs to the air cleanerhousing.

3. Install the air cleaner housingcover using the four screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Cooling System

2.4 L L4 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fan (Outof View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap


10-16 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fans (Outof View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on alevel surface.

The coolant level should be at theCOLD FILL line. If it is not, thevehicle may have a leak at theradiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, withthe engine on, check to see if theelectric engine cooling fan isrunning. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-17

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑20.

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrong

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

mixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


10-18 Vehicle Care

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at orabove the COLD FILL line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before this isdone. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problem yet,check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If coolantis visible but the coolant level is notat the COLD FILL line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap, iscool before you do it. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑20 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


Vehicle Care 10-19

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system is setfor the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you or otherscould be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.


10-20 Vehicle Care

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture, to the COLD FILL line.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the COLDFILL line.

5. Replace the pressure cap. Besure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator to warnof engine overheating. There is anengine coolant temperature warninglight on the vehicle's instrumentpanel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge on page 5‑11.

The decision may be made not to liftthe hood when this warningappears, but instead get servicehelp right away. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.

If the decision to lift the hood ismade, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan(s) are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan(s)should be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.


Vehicle Care 10-21

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before you openthe hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gauge isno longer in the overheat zone or anoverheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine)

The power steering fluid reservoir islocated toward the rear of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

The power steering fluid does notneed to be checked unless there isa leak in the system or you hear anunusual noise. Have the systeminspected and repaired if there is afluid loss.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Notice: Extremely small amountsof contamination can causesteering system damage andcause it to not work properly. Donot allow contaminants to contactthe fluid side of the reservoir cap/dipstick or from entering thereservoir.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the engine off and let itcool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. Referto Engine Cover on page 10‑10.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenMAX and MIN line at roomtemperature. If the fluid is on orbelow MIN line, add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Washer Fluid

What to Use

Read the manufacturer'sinstructions before refilling thewindshield washer fluid. If operatingthe vehicle in an area where thetemperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficientprotection against freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it and add washer fluiduntil full. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for reservoirlocation.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes. Discbrake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


10-24 Vehicle Care

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the front andrear brakes — for the worse. Thebraking performance expected canchange in many other ways if thewrong replacement brake parts areinstalled.

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluid asindicated on the reservoir cap. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.


Vehicle Care 10-25

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove brake fluid,as necessary, only when work isdone on the brake hydraulic system.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑17.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake fluid.

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brakehydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled on thevehicle's painted surfaces,the paint finish can bedamaged. Be careful not tospill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.


10-26 Vehicle Care

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑74 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, the vehicle will needsome lubricant added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. A fluidloss could indicate a problem; checkand have it repaired, if needed.


Vehicle Care 10-27

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑34.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑34.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.


10-28 Vehicle Care

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when the shiftlever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removed indifferent ways. For proper type andlength, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the square button on thetop side, at the end of the wiperarm, and pull the wiper blade outof the end of the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the square buttonon the wiper blade clicks intoplace with the wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back on thewindshield.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiper armhave a cover for protection. Thecover must be removed before thewiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool under thecover and push upward tounsnap.

2. Slide the cover towards thewiper blade tip to unhook it fromthe blade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that cover hook slidesinto the slot in the bladeassembly.

5. Snap the cover down to secure.


10-30 Vehicle Care

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

A. Wiper Arm

B. Release Lever

C. Blade Assembly

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade assembly (C).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealeradjust the headlamps. To re-aim theheadlamps yourself, use thefollowing procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows. The vehicle:. Should be placed so the

headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) froma light colored wall.

. Must have all four tires on alevel surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

. Should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall or otherflat surface.

. Should not have any snow, ice,or mud on it.

. Should be fully assembled andall other work stopped whileheadlamp aiming is beingperformed.

. Should be normally loaded witha full tank of fuel and one personor 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on thedriver's seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps. Thehigh-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.


Vehicle Care 10-31

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Record thedistance.

4. At the wall measure from theground upward (A) to therecorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of the markin Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to theheadlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a piece ofcardboard or equivalent in frontof the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.


10-32 Vehicle Care

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam isaimed to the horizontal tape line.Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrectheadlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑36.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-33

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

A. Low Beam Headlamp

B. High Beam headlamp

C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp

D. Side Marker Lamp

To replace:

1. Turn the tire to reach the accessport cap located on front ofwheel well cover.

A. Screw

B. Access Port Cap

2. Remove screw (A) and turnaccess port cap (B)counterclockwise to remove.

3. If replacing low/high headlampbulb, remove the dust cover capfrom the back of the headlamphousing by turning the capcounterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove fromlamp assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from thesocket or disconnect bulbassembly from harnessconnector.

6. Install new bulb.

7. Reinstall the lamp socket tolamp assembly turningclockwise.

8. Replace the dust cover cap onheadlamps.

9. Reinstall the wheel well coveraccess port cap and secure byinstalling screw.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Fog LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Locate the fog lamp assemblyunder the front facia.

2. Disconnect the bulb socket fromthe electrical connector, turn andpull out the bulb assembly.

3. Remove the old bulb from thebulb socket and push the newbulb straight into the bulb socketuntil it connects.

4. Push the bulb socket into the foglamp assembly and turnclockwise to lock it into place.

5. Reconnect the bulb socket to theelectrical connector.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

A. Sidemarker

B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp

C. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 2‑9 or Liftgate(Power) on page 2‑10.

2. Remove the two screw coversfrom the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the two screwssecuring the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull taillamp assembly out ofvehicle body.

5. Disconnect the lamp wiringharness.


Vehicle Care 10-35

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

7. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.

8. Install the new bulb.

9. Push the bulb socket in and turnit clockwise.

10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 toreinstall lamp assembly.

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate partway. SeeLiftgate (Manual) on page 2‑9 orLiftgate (Power) on page 2‑10for more information.

Passenger side shown, driver sidesimilar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly towards the right.

3. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove from liftgate.

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove fromlamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall into lamp assembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.


10-36 Vehicle Care

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921

Fog Lamp Front H11

HeadlampHigh Beam

9005LL

HeadlampLow Beam H11

License Plate Lamp 168LL

Parking Lamp/TurnSignal Front

7444NA

Sidemarker Frontand Rear

194

Taillamp/Turn SignalLamp/Stop Lamp 3157K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits byfuses. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureto replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

There are two fuse blocks in thevehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in theinstrument panel.

There is a fuse puller located in theengine compartment fuse block.See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑37. It can be usedto easily remove fuses from the fuseblock.


Vehicle Care 10-37

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips on the cover andlift it straight up. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Cool Fan 1

2 Cool Fan 2

J-CaseFuses

Usage

3 Brake Booster

4PowerWindows – Right

5Memory SeatModule


10-38 Vehicle Care

J-CaseFuses

Usage

6 Power Seat – Left

7Instrument PanelFuse Block 1

8 Rear Defogger

9 Starter

10 AIR Pump Motor


12 Sunroof

13Antilock BrakeSystem Pump


15PowerWindows – Left

16Antilock BrakeSystem Module

Mini Fuses Usage

17TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

18 Trailer Parking Light

19 AIR Pump Solenoid

20Engine ControlModule Battery

21 Canister Vent

22Trailer Left Side(If Equipped)

23 Lift Gate Module

24 Power Lumbar

25Trailer Right Side(If Equipped)

26Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

27Memory MirrorModule

Mini Fuses Usage

28Regulated VoltageControl BatterySensor

29 Front Wiper

30 Rear Wiper

31Air ConditioningCompressor

32 Rear Latch

33 Heated Mirrors

34 Horn

35Right High‐BeamHeadlamp

36Left High‐BeamHeadlamp

37 Ignition Even Coil

38 Ignition Odd Coil

39 Windshield Washer

40 Front Fog Lamps


Vehicle Care 10-39

Mini Fuses Usage

41Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

42Engine ControlModule

43Pre–CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

44TransmissionControl Module

45 Mirror

46 Chassis ControlModule Ignition

47 Spare

48 Rear Drive Module

49Lift Gate ModuleLogic

Mini Fuses Usage

50 Instrument PanelFuse Block Ignition

51 Heated Seat – Front

52Chassis ControlModule

53Engine ControlModule

54 Rear Vision Camera

Midi Fuse Usage

55Electric PowerSteering

MicroRelays

Usage

56 AIR Pump Solenoid

57 Brake Booster

58 Cooling Fan Low

MicroRelays

Usage

59HeadlampHigh Beam

60 Cooling Fan Control

61Wiper On/OffControl

62Air ConditioningCompressor

63 Rear Defogger

64 Wiper Speed

65 Fog Lamp

66 Engine Control

67 Starter

68 Run/Crank

Mini Relays Usage

69 Cooling Fan High

70 AIR Pump Motor


10-40 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block islocated on the passenger side panelof the center console. To access thefuses, open the fuse panel doorfrom the passenger side by pullingit out.

To reinstall the door, insert the tabson the top of the door into theconsole first, then push the doorback into its original location.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block


Vehicle Care 10-41

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Steering WheelDimming

2 Spare

3 Spare

4Body ControlModule 1

5 Infotainment


7Noise ControlModule

8 Body ControlModule 4

9 Radio

10Special EquipmentOrder Battery

11Ultrasonic RearParking AssistModule

Mini Fuses Usage

12Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBattery

13Auxiliary PowerFront

14Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningIgnition

15 Display


17 AuxiliaryPower Rear

18Instrument PanelCluster Ignition

19Personal DeviceInterface Module


Mini Fuses Usage

21Special EquipmentOrder RetainedAccessory Power

22Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

23 Spare

24 Spare

25Transmission GearShift PositionIndicator

26 Spare

27 Spare

28 Spare


31 Amplifier


10-42 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

32 Discrete LogicIgnition Switch

33CommunicationsIntegration Module


35Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleBattery

36Data LinkConnection

37 Instrument PanelCluster Battery

38Passenger SensingSystem Module

39 Spare

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

29 Front Blower Motor


Relays Usage

41Logistic Relay(If Equipped)

42Retained AccessoryPower Relay

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer. Seethe warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-43

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces such assnow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,


10-44 Vehicle Care

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance withthe U.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑60.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.


Vehicle Care 10-45

(B) Temporary Use Only: Thecompact spare tire or temporaryuse tire has a tread life ofapproximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has acompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑64.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code arethe Tire Identification Number(TIN). The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,

tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflated to420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).


Vehicle Care 10-47

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑50.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle WeightRating for the front axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.


10-48 Vehicle Care

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: Theload rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire thathas a particular side that facesoutward when mounted on avehicle. The side of the tire thatcontains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: Atire used on passenger cars andsome light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.


Vehicle Care 10-49

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑50andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across the treadof a tire when only 1.6 mm (1/16 in) of tread remains. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑57.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑60.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: Thenumber of designated seatingpositions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16.


10-50 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.


Vehicle Care 10-51

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑16. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The cold compact spare shouldbe at 420 kPa (60 psi). Foradditional information regardingthe compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑73.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or


10-52 Vehicle Care

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or moreof your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tiretread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑53 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate the

tires to the recommended pressureshown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tires areinflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed. Foradditional information and detailsabout the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑24.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑16, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑50.

The TPMS can warn about alow tire pressure condition but itdoes not replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑56, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑56 and Tires onpage 10‑42.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.


10-54 Vehicle Care

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. The low tirepressure warning light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire. Thespare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done or notcompleted successfully afterrotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing thesensor matching process. See"TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the TPMSmalfunction light should go offwhen the TPMS sensors areinstalled and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealer forservice.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑58.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS


Vehicle Care 10-55

relearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to match thefirst tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match all fourtire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information Menu inthe Driver Information Center(DIC). Use the arrow keys toscroll to the Tire Pressurescreen.

4. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

5. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


10-56 Vehicle Care

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achieve auniform wear for all tires. Thefirst rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels. SeeWhen It Is Time for New Tireson page 10‑57 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑62.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.


Vehicle Care 10-57

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated. SeeTire Pressure on page 10‑50and Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑16.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑53.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑56 and TireRotation on page 10‑56 for moreinformation.


10-58 Vehicle Care

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should be freeof grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the same TPCSpec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,

traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑43 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑56and Tire Rotation on page 10‑56for information on proper tirerotation.


Vehicle Care 10-59

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑51.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.


10-60 Vehicle Care

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safety iftires not recommended for thosewheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only use GMspecific wheel and tire systemsdeveloped for the vehicle, andhave them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑58 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tires bytreadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires. TheUniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG) system does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires, space-saver, or temporary


Vehicle Care 10-61

use spare tires, tires withnominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),or to some limited-productiontires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government test

course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured undercontrolled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction grade

assigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A(the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can leadto sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and


10-62 Vehicle Care

A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smooth

road, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑64 for more information.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

A Type S low-profile cable can beused only if the cablemanufacturer recommends it foruse on the vehicle, the tire sizecombination, and road conditions.Follow the manufacturer'sinstructions. To help avoiddamage to the vehicle, driveslowly, readjust or remove thecable if it is contacting the vehicleand do not spin the vehicle's tires.Install the cables on the front tiresonly. Cables should not beinstalled on the spare tire or onthe optional 19-inch tire.


10-64 Vehicle Care

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle. It may bevery bumpy and noisy. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soon aspossible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


Vehicle Care 10-65

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle frommoving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) or amanual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 2‑9 or Liftgate(Power) on page 2‑10.

2. Lift the load floor up.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Coin/Pierce Jack with One-PieceWrench

A. Extension

B. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack

Hex-Head Jack with Three-PieceWrench

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack

3. If you have a coin/pierce jackand one-piece wrench, removethe extension (A), wheelwrench (B) and jack (C).

If you have a hex-head jack andthree-piece wrench, remove thewheel wrench (A) and jack (B).

Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.

4. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise and removethe spare tire.

5. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.


Vehicle Care 10-67

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑64 for moreinformation.

2. For vehicles with a wheel coveror center cap, pull the cover orcenter cap away from the wheelto remove it. Store the wheelcover in the cargo area until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced. 3. Turn the wheel wrench

counterclockwise to loosen allthe wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge of thefront and rear door plasticmolding. The jack must not beused in any other position.


10-68 Vehicle Care

5. Place the jack notch under theframe rail seam.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

6. Place the jack under the vehicle.

7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack andinsert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

If you have a hex-head jack,attach the jack lift-assist tool byplacing the hex of the jacklift-assist tool over the hex headof the jack.

Hex Head Jack and Wrench


Vehicle Care 10-69

Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raise thevehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.


10-70 Vehicle Care

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle by turningthe jack handlecounterclockwise.

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.


Vehicle Care 10-71

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additional one‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

To store the flat tire:

1. Remove the cable package. Thecable is stored in a plastic bagunder the compact spare tire.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valve stempointing toward the rear of thevehicle.


10-72 Vehicle Care

A. Cable

B. Liftgate Hinges

C. Center of the Wheel

D. Door Striker

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (D) then the centerof the wheel (C).

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other side ofthe vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Push thetube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.


Vehicle Care 10-73

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible and checkthat the spare tire is correctlyinflated after installing the spare onthe vehicle. The compact spare isdesigned to perform well at speedsup to 105 km/h (65 mph) fordistances up to 5 000 km (3,000 mi),so a trip can be completed and thefull-size tire repaired or replacedwhen possible. However, thecompact spare tire will last longerand be in good shape if it isreplaced as soon as possible.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑26.

Jump starting can be used onvehicles with run‐down batteries byusing jumper cables and anothervehicle.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely. Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage to thevehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they could bedamaged. The repairs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-75

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.

1. The vehicle used to jump startmust have 12-volt battery with anegative ground.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. The vehicles should be closeenough for the jumper cables toreach, but the vehicles shouldnot be touching. Touching couldcause grounding and possibleelectrical system damage.

Put both vehicles in P (Park)and set the parking brake firmly.

3. Unplug accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that arenot needed. Turn off the ignitionon both vehicles.

4. Locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals on bothvehicles. Some vehicles haveremote jump starting terminals.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

5. The remote positive (+)terminal (A) is located on theunderhood fuse block, on thedriver side. Lift the red cap touncover the terminal.


10-76 Vehicle Care

The remote negative (−)terminal (B) is a stud behind themetal tab stamped with GND (−)near the driver side strut tower.

6. The jumper cables should be ingood working condition with noloose or missing insulation. Thevehicles could be damaged ifthey are not.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

8. Do not let the other end touchmetal. Connect it to thepositive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehiclehas one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step. Theother end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine.

12. Press the unlock symbol on theremote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm thesecurity system, if equipped.

13. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles,

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse blockcover to its original position,if applicable.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.


10-78 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity of

the towing vehicle? Be sure toread the tow vehiclemanufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles may bedinghy towed from the front. Thesevehicles can also be towed byplacing them on a platform trailerwith all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that will betowed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Turn all accessories off.


Vehicle Care 10-79

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuse 32,the Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch fuse, from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block onpage 10‑40.

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwithout performing each of thesteps listed under “DinghyTowing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Install fuse 32, the DiscreteLogic Ignition Switch fuse. SeeInstrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10‑40.

5. Start the engine and let it idle formore than three minutes beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure that thetransmission fluid is at the properlevel before towing with all fourwheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehicle withthe front drive wheels on theground if one of the front tires isa compact spare tire. Towing withtwo different tire sizes on thefront of the vehicle can causesevere damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐DriveVehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts, icemelting agents, road oil and tar, treesap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can

damage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreignmatter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish. Seeyour dealer for approved cleaningproducts.

Notice: Machine compounding oraggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.


10-82 Vehicle Care

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to a high polish, isrecommended for all bright metalparts.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft,clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed afterdriving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such as iceand dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and water afterexposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and thesteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior. Use cleanersspecifically designed for thesurfaces being cleaned to preventpermanent damage. To preventoverspray, apply all cleaners directlyto the cleaning cloth. Cleanersshould be removed quickly. Neverallow cleaners to remain on thesurface being cleaned for extendedperiods of time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doors andwindows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 drops per3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.


Vehicle Care 10-85

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water or clubsoda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in to thefabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean the entirefabric or carpet.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers. Donot use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.

Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two retainers.

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock each retainer andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


10-88 Vehicle Care

2 NOTES


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule to helpprotect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipment forfast and accurate diagnostics. Manydealers have extended evening andSaturday hours, courtesytransportation, and onlinescheduling to assist with serviceneeds.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such as oilchanges and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Normal are forvehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑16.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel. SeeRecommended Fuel onpage 9‑51.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are for vehiclesthat are:. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑56.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑56.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑10 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑12.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑17.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑23.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑81. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑29.



. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑50.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑56.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑81.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑19.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑81.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑27.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑27.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑28.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑28.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑21.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed if thevehicle is driven in areas with heavytraffic, areas with poor air quality,or areas with high dust levels.Replacement may also be needed ifthere is a reduction in air flow,excessive window fogging, or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑15.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if they

squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect the belts andrecommend replacement whennecessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 for GMapproved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend the righttires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.



Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle looking likenew, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑84 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑81.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, inCanada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(V6 engines only)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, inCanada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —

Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal

3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)

2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt

3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑13 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 K Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

3.0L V6 5 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-5GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-17Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of itsparticipation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, andmay include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The program isdesigned so that the entire disputesettlement process, from the timeyou file your complaint to the finaldecision, should be completed inabout 70 days. We believe ourimpartial program offers advantagesover courts in most jurisdictionsbecause it is informal, quick, andfree of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994



Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.



Online Owner Center

Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)www.chevyownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also hasa Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.



Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.



Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors of CanadaLimited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and a copy ofthe repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor may givepermission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.

Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.



Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offerone of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.



Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements will beadministered by appropriate dealerpersonnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.



Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New Vehicle

Limited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in the GMvehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in thequality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensation fordamage repairs by using

aftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage is notavailable from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑26.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you may beobligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. TheOwner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted in U.S.funds. Make checks payable in U.S.funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may callthe Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited. CallTransport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (orTransport Canada) in a situation likethis, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.



Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation manual for information onstored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.


14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistance inemergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped with theseservices. OnStar can unlock thevehicle doors remotely, if it isequipped with automatic door locks,and can help police locate thevehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinations canalso be forwarded to the vehiclefrom Google Maps™ orMapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say“Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com to theirTurn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download: PushQ, then request the Advisor todownload directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screen tobegin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go. Forinformation about eNav, DestinationDownload, and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and received fromthe vehicle. The vehicle can also becontrolled from a cell phone throughthe OnStar mobile app. Seewww.onstar.com for coverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” and thearea code. System responds:“OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds: “Callended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device, anOnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle can beremote started, if equipped, or thedoors can be unlocked fromanywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.


OnStar 14-5

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes, andmajor vehicle systems. It alsochecks the tire pressures, if thevehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System. If adiagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, and anAdvisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the prompts tospeak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are availableeverywhere or on all vehicles. Formore information, a full descriptionof OnStar services, systemlimitations, and OnStar terms andconditions, see www.onstar.com(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipment orsoftware is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑17 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle. Theavailable dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricing andsign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be prompted tochange the PIN the first time whenspeaking with an Advisor. Tochange the OnStar PIN, call OnStarand provide the Advisor with thecurrent number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmed torespond in French or Spanish. PushQ and ask an Advisor. Advisorscan speak French or Spanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area with verydense trees. If GPS signals arenot available, the OnStar systemshould still operate to callOnStar. However, OnStar couldhave difficulty identifying theexact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.


14-8 OnStar

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑63. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy of anyinformation sent via wireless cellularcommunications cannot be assured.Third parties may unlawfullyintercept or access transmissionsand private communications withoutconsent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-23AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator . . .5-13Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-33AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14, 7-16AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-32

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-27

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-34Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-36, 7-38, 7-42Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-17Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-21Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-34, 6-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-35Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-34

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-52Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-14CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-28

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-43

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-50, 3-52Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-13

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-26, 9-33

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-26Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-12If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-15Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13


i-4 INDEX

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Cooling System Messages . . .5-29Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10

Engine (cont.)Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-29Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-62Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .10-34, 6-4

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-52Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-51Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-22


INDEX i-5

Fuel (cont.)Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51Requirements, California . . . . .9-52System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-32Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-23

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-3

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-12Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-35Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii


i-6 INDEX

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-30Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-43LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-15On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . 9-48Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-49

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10

LightStabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-17Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-21Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Lights (cont.)High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-18Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-12Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5


INDEX i-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-15Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-32Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-29Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Messages (cont.)Object Detection System . . . . .5-30Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-31Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

Navigation, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-35Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-5


i-8 INDEX

OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-13

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3, 7-5

Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParkShifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-28

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-28Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-28Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-36, 7-38, 7-42

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-25Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-17

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-9

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-17Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . .7-14, 7-16Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-23Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34

Rear Seat Entertainment SystemRear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-34

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10


INDEX i-9

Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-45Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview MirrorAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-34Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-18

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-14General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7


i-10 INDEX

Seats (cont.)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50, 3-52

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13

Security, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2


INDEX i-11

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-53Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-51Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56

Tires (cont.)Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-62When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-57Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-56Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-78Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-63Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-35Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-63

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-43Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv


i-12 INDEX

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-34Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Warning LightForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-41Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Documents

2012 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M - General Motors · Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (3,1) Introduction iii The names, logos, emblems, slogans, vehicle model